13-002 water treatment plant upgrades - accelator repairs

CITY OF DANIA BEACH

LIME SOFTENING PLANT REHABILITATION - ACCELATOR REPAIRS

VOLUME II

City of Dania Beach Bid No. 13-002

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Prepared by

City of Dania Beach Public Services Department 100 W. Dania Beach Blvd, Dania Beach, FL 33004

and

P.O. Box 221890, Hollywood, FL 33022-1890

February 2013

Document 00002

PROJECT DATA Project Title: Lime Softening Plant Rehabilitation – Accelator Repairs Project Number: City Bid No. 12- Project Address: 1201 Stirling Road Dania Beach, Florida 33004 Project Owner: City of Dania Beach 100 West Dania Beach Boulevard Dania Beach, Florida 33004 City Commission: Mayor Walter B. Duke III Albert C. Jones, Vice-Mayor Chickie Brandimarte, Commissioner

Pat Flury, Commissioner Bobbie Grace, Commissioner Owner's Representative: Robert Baldwin, City Manager 100 W. Dania Beach Blvd. Dania Beach, Florida 33004 Telephone: 954-924-6800 X 3616 Fax: 954-921-2604 Project Manager: Dominic F. Orlando, P.E. Director of Public Services City of Dania Beach 100 Dania Beach Blvd. Dania Beach, FL 33004 Telephone: 954-924-3740 Fax: 954-921-1109 Project Consultant: Frederick Bloetscher, Ph.D., P.E.

P.O. Box 221890, Hollywood, FL 33022-1890

END OF PROJECT DATA

2

Document 00003

TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME II

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01000 Contractor Special Conditions 01010 Summary of Work 01014 Construction Sequencing 01046 Modifications to Existing Structures, Piping and Equipment 01152 Applications for Payment 01170 Special Provisions 01250 Measurement and Payment 01300 Submittals 01310 Construction Schedule 01370 Schedule Of Values 01505 Control Of Work 01600 Material And Equipment 01625 Plant Start-Up 01700 Project Close-out 01710 Cleaning 01720 Project Record Documents 01730 Operation And Maintenance Data 01740 Warranties And Bonds

DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK

02050 Demolition

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03301 Concrete and Reinforcing Steel

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY - NOT USED DIVISION 5 – METALS

05120 Structural Steel 05500 Miscellaneous Metal 05510 Metal Stairs and Railing System

DIVISION 6 – CARPENTRY WORK – NOT USED

3

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION – NOT USED DIVISION 8 - DOORS WINDOWS AND GLASS – NOT USED DIVISION 9 – FINISHES 09900 Painting

09901 Surface Preparation and Shop Prime Painting 09902 Finished Painting

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES – NOT USED DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11240 Lime Feed Systems

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS – NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13300 Process Instrumentation and Controls- General Provisions

13315 Process Instrumentation and Controls – Products

13325 Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS - NOT USED DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 15020 Field Erection of Mechanical Equipment

15051 Technical Specifications - General 15052 Technical Specifications – Water Materials

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

16000 General Electrical 16115 Cable Trays 16120 Wires and Cables (600 Volt Maximum)

4

16150 Motors

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

5

Document 00004

LIST OF DRAWINGS INDEX OF SHEETS - COVER SHEET SHEET NO. TITLE LIME SOFTENING PLANT REHABILITATION – ACCELATOR REPAIRS 1 of 20 SITE PLAN ACCELERATORS, CATWALK AND PIPE TRAY REHABILITATION 7 OF 20 SITE PLAN 8 OF 20 PLAN 9 OF 20 CATWALK, GRATING AND STAIRS 10 OF 20 CATWALK TRAY AND CHEMICAL PIPING 11 OF 20 PLANS AND SECTIONS 12 OF 20 DATA SHEETS AND DETAILS 13 OF 20 PLAN AND DETAILS

END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS

Accelator Upgrade Bid 6 City of Dania Beach 2/27/2013

SECTION 01000

CONTRACTOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS

1.01. DEMONSTRATING WORK EXPERTISE

A. (NOT USED)

B. INVESTIGATION AND UTILITIES.

1. CONTRACTOR shall have the sole responsibility of satisfying itself concerning the nature and location of the Work and the general and local conditions, and particularly, but without limitation, with respect to the following: those affecting transportation, access, disposal, handling and storage of materials; availability and quality of labor; water and electric power; availability and condition of roads; work area; living facilities; climatic conditions and seasons; physical conditions at the work-site and the project area as a whole; topography and ground surface conditions; nature and quantity of the surface materials to be encountered; subsurface conditions; equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during performance of the Work; and all other costs associated with such performance. The failure of CONTRACTOR to acquaint itself with any applicable conditions shall not relieve CONTRACTOR from any of its responsibilities to perform under the Contract Documents, nor shall it be considered the basis for any claim for additional time or compensation.

2. CONTRACTOR shall locate all existing roadways, railways, drainage facilities and utility services above, upon, or under the Project site, said roadways, railways, drainage facilities and utilities being referred to in this Sub-Section 2.2 as the "Utilities". CONTRACTOR shall contact the owners of all Utilities to determine the necessity for relocating or temporarily interrupting any Utilities during the construction of the Project. CONTRACTOR shall schedule and coordinate its Work around any such relocation or temporary service interruption. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for properly shoring, supporting and protecting all Utilities at all times during the course of the Work.

C. BID QUANTITIES

1. Quantities given in the Bid Schedule, while estimated from the best information available, are

approximate only. Payment for unit price items shall be based on the actual number of units installed for the Work. Bids shall be compared on the basis of number of units stated in the Bid Schedule as set forth in the Bidding Documents. Said unit prices shall be multiplied by the bid quantities for the total Bid price. Any Bid not conforming to this requirement may be rejected. Special attention to all Bidders is called to this provision, for should conditions make it necessary or prudent to revise the unit quantities, the unit prices will be fixed for such increased or decreased quantities. Compensation for such additive or subtractive changes in the quantities shall be limited to the unit prices in the Bid.

D. PROGRESS PAYMENTS.

1. Prior to submitting its first monthly Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit

to CITY, for their review and approval, a schedule of values based upon the Contract Price, listing the major elements of the Work and the dollar value for each element. After its


approval by the CITY AND ENGINEER, this schedule of values shall be used as the basis for the CONTRACTOR's monthly Applications for Payment. This schedule shall be updated and submitted each month to the ENGINEER along with a completed and notarized copy of the Application for Payment.

2. Prior to submitting its first monthly Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to CITY AND ENGINEER a complete list of all its proposed SUBCONTRACTORs and materialmen, showing the work and materials involved and the dollar amount of each proposed subcontract and purchase order. The first Application for Payment shall be submitted no earlier than thirty (30) days after the Commencement Date.

3. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated into the Project, but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at another location agreed to by the CITY in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice or other documentation warranting that the CITY has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all liens, charges, security interests and encumbrances, together with evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance and other arrangements to protect CITY's interest therein, all of which shall be subject to the CITY's satisfaction.

E. DAILY REPORTS, AS-BUILTS AND MEETINGS.

1. Unless waived in writing by CITY, CONTRACTOR shall complete and submit to

ENGINEER on a weekly basis a daily log of the CONTRACTOR's work for the preceding week in a format approved by the ENGINEER and CITY. The daily log shall document all activities of CONTRACTOR at the Project site including, but not limited to, the following:

2. Weather conditions showing the high and low temperatures during work hours, the amount of precipitation received on the Project site, and any other weather conditions which adversely affect the Work;

3. Soil conditions which adversely affect the Work;

4. The hours of operation by CONTRACTOR's and SUBCONTRACTOR's personnel;

5. The number of CONTRACTOR's and SUBCONTRACTOR's personnel present and working

at the Project site, by subcontract and trade;

6. All equipment present at the Project site, description of equipment use and designation of time equipment was used (specifically indicating any down time);

7. Description of Work being performed at the Project site;

8. Any unusual or special occurrences at the Project site;

9. Materials received at the Project site;

10. A list of all visitors to the Project site; and

11. Any problems that might impact either the cost or quality of the Work or the time of

performance.


The daily log shall not constitute nor take the place of any notice required to be given by CONTRACTOR to CITY or ENGINEER pursuant to the Contract Documents.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK

A. All work of this Contract is located within the property limits of the City of Dania Beach Water Plant.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services and incidentals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as shown on the Drawings to rehabilitate the existing lime softening plant. The project is titled: “City of Dania Beach Accelator Repair.”

B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the work complete, in place, where applicable and make

ready for continuous service, and shall include repairs, replacements and restoration required as a result of damages caused during this construction.

C. Furnish and install all materials, equipment and labor which is reasonably and properly inferable

and necessary for the proper completion of the work, whether specifically indicated in the Contract Documents or not.

1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF CONTRACT

A. The work in general consists of furnishing and installing improvements at the Water Treatment Plant including, but not limited to work shown in Table 1-1 below.

B. The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mobilization/Demobilization, General Requirements, Bonds, and Insurance

2. Catwalks and affected equipment, accelators, painting, and miscellaneous tasks. 3. The work will include:

a. Demolition/Removal b. Installation c. Start-up


4. General conditions including scheduling, project coordination, field work , submittals and

shop drawings, record drawings and other requirements, as specified for the coordination and execution of the Work

A. Work Tasks are described in Table 1-1

Table: 1-1 Work Tasks System Task # Reference

Figure(s) Treatment unit

Replace aerator assemblies (1 per unit)

2 8,11,12

Catwalk Replace corroded catwalks (elevated walkways)

All 8,9

Catwalk Add stairway on west end of catwalk

1 8,9

Catwalk Replace east stairway and landing

1 8,9

Catwalk replace cable tray under catwalk 1 10 Catwalk Repair Accelator weirs 16 13 Catwalk Replace filter pipe supports 9 9 Catwalk Replace mixer drive units 2 12 Catwalk Replace small electrical panels

for filters 4 12

Catwalk Replace stairway on east end of catwalk

1 9

Treatment unit

Replace Accelator mixers 2 11

Treatment unit

Replace Accelator interior piping

As required

13

Pipe/ cable tray

Replace chemical dosing pipes 6 10

Accelators Assessment of submerged equipment by factory rep

2 trips minimum

NA

Treatment equipment

Startup services for Accelators (factory rep)

1 trip NA

1.04 CONTRACTURAL MILESTONES

A. The Work shall be completed to meet Partial Completion, Substantial Completion and Final Inspection milestones. The work associated with each of these milestones is defined below:

B. Partial completion means 1 treatment unit put back in service.

C. To satisfy the definition of Substantial Completion, the work shall be completed and ready to

be utilized for its intended purpose (as defined in Section 01014). It requires that the plant is capable of producing the design capacity of 3 mgd.


D. Final Completion as defined in Section 01014.

1.05 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

A. CONTRACTOR shall be aware that there is an operating water treatment plant, a minimum of 50% of which (e.g. 1.5 mgd) must be kept in service on a continuous basis.

B. Coordinate use of premises with the OWNER. All conflicts over use of the premises shall be resolved without additional cost to the OWNER.

C. CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for security of all their and their subcontractor’s

materials and equipment stored on the site. D. Site Security: 1. General – Code Yellow or Less:

a. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain temporary security fences as necessary to protect the Work and CONTRACTOR’s furnished products not yet installed.

b. All employees shall have a CONTRACTOR’s provided photo identification badge to be worn at all times while on this secure project site.

d. Visitors shall be required to obtain daily visitor badges and vehicle access. e. Obtain approval in writing from the OWNER for work on this secure site outside of

normal working hours. Approval must be available for inspection while working on the site after hours.

2. Code Orange Conditions for Work on Secure Sites: a. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a list, to be updated weekly or whenever employees

are added or removed, of all employees and subcontractor employees to be provided site access. Access for employees or visitors cannot be guaranteed and is subject to the discretion of security personnel.

b. All CONTRACTOR employees shall wear badges and sign-in daily. c. The CONTRACTOR shall provide advance notice and coordinate with the OWNER for

screening and delivery of all materials and supplies, including FedEx, US Postal service, UPS, and all general delivery items.

1) All packages for the water treatment plant site will be delivered through the secure entrance gate.

2) All packages shall have the name of a CONTRACTOR’s employee stationed at the jobsite.

3) All delivery drivers shall have suitable photo identification and will be required to go through security procedures.

4) No delay claims will be allowed for failure to obtain clearance for deliveries or to delays associated with the above processes.

3. Code Red Conditions: a. Work on this secure site will be stopped for the duration of code red conditions. No

access by CONTRACTOR or subcontractor personnel will be permitted until clearance has been granted by the OWNER.

b. The CONTRACTOR will be compensated for standby delay under code red conditions as provided in other Sections.

E. If directed by the OWNER or ENGINEER, move any stored items which interfere with

operations of OWNER at no additional cost to the OWNER.

F. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas if needed to perform the Work.


1.06 OWNER OCCUPANCY

A. Coordinate all construction operations with OWNER and ENGINEER to minimize conflict and to facilitate OWNER usage.

1.07 ABBREVIATIONS AND REFERENCES A. Whenever reference is made to the furnishing of materials or testing thereof to conform to the

standards of any technical society, organization or body, it shall be construed to mean the latest standard, code, specification or tentative specification adopted and published at the date of advertisement for bids, even though reference has been made to an earlier standard. The following list of specifications is hereby made a part of the Contract the same as if herein repeated in full. In the event of any conflict between any of these specifications, standards, codes or tentative specifications, and the Specifications, the latter shall govern. In the event that one of the following conflicts with another, the decision as to which shall govern will be decided by the ENGINEER, whose judgment will be final.

B. Reference to a technical society, organization, or body may be made in the Specifications by

abbreviations, in accordance with the following list:

AASHTO - The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI - American Concrete Institute AGA - American Gas Association AGMA - American Gear Manufacturers Association IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers AISC - American Institute of Steel Construction AISI - American Iron and Steel Institute ANSI - American National Standards Institute API - American Petroleum Institute ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society of Testing Materials AWPA - American Wood Preservers Association AWS - American Welding Society AWWA - American Water Works Association FED.SPEC- Federal Specifications CIPRA - Cast Iron Pipe Research Association DIPRA - Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association NCPI - National Clay Pipe Institute NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association NEWWA - New England Water Works Association TCA - Tile Council of America Inc. AWPA - American Wood Preservation Association NAVY SPEC. - Navy Department Specification NEC - National Electric Code NLMA - National Lumber Manufacturers Association SAE - Society of Automotive Engineers Standards SHBI - Steel Heating Boiler Institute SBCC - Standard Building Code Congress International, Inc.


DOT - Florida Department of Transportation U.L., Inc. - Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. OSHA - Occupation Health and Safety Act SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council ISA - Instrument Society of America EPA - Environmental Protection Agency (U.S.) IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. C. When no reference is made to a code, standard, or specification, the standard specifications of

the ASTM, the ANSI, the ASME, the IEEE, or the NEMA shall govern. END OF SECTION


SECTION 01014 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Several areas of construction under this contract must be coordinated with the Plant Chief Operator at the water treatment plant and accomplished in a logical order to maintain the process flow through the plant and to allow construction to be completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors, if any, to allow orderly and timely completion of all the work.

B. When access through construction areas must be disrupted, CONTRACTOR will provide

alternate acceptable access for operation personnel or other contractors. C. CONTRACTOR is required to coordinate his activities in the interface or common areas with

other contractors and the operation personnel. D. Various interconnections within the plant will depend on the closure of various valves. Many of

these valves are old, may be difficult to operate, and may not seal properly. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the plant chief operator prior to attempting any such closure and shall provide any corrective measures or temporary facilities necessary to attain the shut-off needed to perform the work at no additional cost to the OWNER and without interrupting the plant operation.

E. Various interconnections within the plant may require temporary partial power shutdown.

CONTRACTOR will make every effort necessary to minimize the shutdown time and will coordinate with the ENGINEER, plant operating personnel, and/or utility authorities at least five (5) working days prior to attempting any such power shutdown. Furthermore, CONTRACTOR will provide any corrective measure or temporary facilities necessary to perform the work at no additional cost to the OWNER and without interrupting the plant operation. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a plan for each anticipated partial power shutdown.

F. Within the Schedule developed in accordance with Section 01310 of the Contract Documents, the

CONTRACTOR shall identify all periods of time during which existing facilities shall be taken out of service, either temporarily or permanently.

G. During Start-Up Testing, CONTRACTOR shall make available the staffing, labor, equipment,

and manufacturer’s representatives required to make any necessary adjustments and training. H. The work under this contract involves the removal of existing equipment with the replacement by

new equipment. It is understood, therefore, that the OWNER must allow reasonable scheduled shutdowns of the facilities in order to perform the necessary work.

I. Scheduled shutdowns will be made in those instances when it is necessary to shut off power in

order to perform the necessary work. Prior to any shutdown, all materials and facilities shall be on hand, and any preparatory work necessary shall have been accomplished before any shutdowns will be allowed. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a plan for each anticipated partial power shutdown.


1.02 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONSTRAINTS

A. CONTRACTOR must not interfere with the operation of the water treatment plant or adjacent Facilities (Department of Public Works, Utilities and Engineering), during construction of the improvements except as shown in section 1.03 below. Available treatment capacity and storage at the plant cannot be assumed to be sufficient to satisfy system demand in a single plant operation scenario for other than brief (less than four hour) periods. This section lists constraints which CONTRACTOR should consider in developing the overall plan of construction. This list of constraints is not intended to release CONTRACTOR from responsibility to coordinate the Work in any manner which will ensure project completion within the time allowed. A construction sequence within each major area of Work, where necessary, is included in this section.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating the work in any manner which will

ensure project completion within the time allowed. C. The OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to perform facility shutdown work during non-

regular working days and hours at no additional cost to the OWNER. D. Within fourteen (14) days after the Notice to Proceed and prior to the submittal of shop or layout

drawings for pipe connecting to existing pipe, the CONTRACTOR shall gather any necessary information so as to avoid subsequent delays in project completion or additional cost to the OWNER. Any unforeseen conditions at the connecting points shall be brought to the OWNER’s and ENGINEER’s attention in writing within 14 days after notice to proceed.

E. CONTRACTOR shall be aware that there may be other contractors on site undertaking other

work. The CONTRACTOR will be expected to cooperate fully in the coordination of the Work with all other onsite contractors so as not to cause delays or additional costs to the OWNER.

1.03 WATER TREATMENT PLANT CONSTRAINTS

A. There are two lime softening units at the plant. Each unit consists of one Accelator with one aerator and two associated media filters.

B. The constraints during construction are:

1. Only one unit can be worked on at a time. The remaining unit must remain operational. 2. Each unit shall be out of service for no longer than 45 calendar days. This includes work on

the Accelator, catwalks, etc. 3. If the unit is out of service for longer than 45 calendar days, the Contractor is subject to

liquidated damages in amounts described in the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor.

4. There is only one lime slurry tank. A temporary tank must be provided to keep the units in service while the tank is being replaced.

5. There are two 100% lime slurry pumps to be replaced. Each is sized to supply both lime softening units. One pump must remain in service at all times.

6. The lime silo must remain in service while being repaired and painted. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE

A. Within 14 days after the effective date of the Agreement, submit to the ENGINEER, a Schedule of Values, Section 01370, and a Construction Sequence Schedule. This schedule shall provide a


listing of major construction items, including new structures, new electrical systems, new equipment, and rehabilitation and/or replacement of major pieces of equipment, and the sequencing of these items of work so as to impact the operation of the water treatment plant and adjacent facilities to the minimum extent possible. As a minimum, the tasks shown in Table 1-1 of Section 01010 should be included in the sequence.

B. The First Notice To Proceed will be issued upon CONTRACTOR's submission of all required

documents and after execution of the CONTRACT by both parties. Preliminary work, including submission of a project schedule, schedule of values, submittals, submittal schedule, and other documents required for permitting, and performance of work that does not require permits, shall be commenced within ten (10) calendar days after the date of the first Notice to Proceed.

C. A Second Notice To Proceed for all other Work will be issued upon Receipt of all permits by

CONTRACTOR. This notice will be issued 45 days from the first notice to proceed. Work pursuant to the second Notice to Proceed shall be commenced within ten (10) calendar days of the date specified in the Notice.

D. Substantial Completion:

1. To satisfy the definition of Substantial Completion, the following Work shall be complete, field pre-operational, startup tested and fully operational by the Substantial Completion date subject to the ENGINEER’s approval.

a. Sufficient work to reliably operate both lime softening units. b. Demolition. c. Start-up and functional tests. e. Painting and coatings. f. All other work in the contract unless otherwise specifically identified in the section, Final

Completion.

E. Final Completion: 1. The last stage of construction shall be final completion of construction and shall include the

final remaining items subject to the ENGINEER’s approval.

a. Punchlist (deficiencies and omissions) b. As-built drawings b. Restoration c. Cleanup

1.05 EXISTING BELOW AND ABOVE GRADE FACILITIES

A. The Contract Documents may contain limited data relative to existing utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface due to lack of accurate records of these installations. These data shown are not guaranteed as to their completeness or accuracy. It is responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to make their own additional investigations in a timely fashion to be fully informed of the character, condition and extent of all such installations and structures as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations and schedule to avoid construction time delays and additional costs to the OWNER.


B. Before the commencement of any construction activities and prior to any demolition, CONTRACTOR shall undertake field investigations in the following areas to identify and locate existing underground utilities and structures.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all utility installations and structures from damage during the

work. Access across any buried public utility installation or structure shall be made only in such locations and by means approved by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at their expense. All existing utilities damaged by the CONTRACTOR which are shown on the Drawings or have been located in the field by CONTRACTOR’s field investigation shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR, at their expense, as directed by the ENGINEER. No separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to utility installations or structures.

D. Utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the OWNER or other governmental body

which are shown on the Drawings to be removed, relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the CONTRACTOR shall be considered as a part of the general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefor.

E. The CONTRACTOR shall, at all times in performance of the work, employ approved methods

and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to avoid unnecessary delay, injury, damage or destruction of utility installations and structures; and shall, at all times in the performance of the work, avoid unnecessary interference with, or interruption of, public utility services, and shall cooperate fully with the OWNERS thereof to that end.

F. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain current and accurate Drawings of the Work including any

changes made during construction. These Drawings shall be submitted to the owner at the end of the project.

1.06 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES

A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment, the CONTRACTOR is advised to schedule the work with the OWNER 10 calendar days in advance. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER/ENGINEER, in writing, at least 10 calendar days in advance of the date he proposes to commence such work.

B. In case the CONTRACTOR’s operation disrupts the lime softening, except for such brief periods

as expressly permitted and required, the CONTRACTOR shall at their own cost immediately make all repairs and replacements and do all work necessary to restore the plant to operation to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. Such work shall progress continuously to completion on a 24-hour, 7-work-day week basis. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services of emergency repair crews on call 24 hours per day.

C. In order to provide adequate treatment of raw water, the existing treatment facilities shall be kept

in continuous operation during construction. Partial shutdowns as approved in the sequence of construction may be allowed. The timing and duration of such shutdown, however, shall be as approved by the OWNER and will be predicated upon plant operating requirements at that time. When the CONTRACTOR desires a partial shutdown, he shall notify the OWNER/ENGINEER a minimum of five (5) working days in advance.


D. Night work and/or work on Saturday or Sunday may be required when making connections to existing pipes, or structures, or during rehabilitation of existing facilities. It will be the decision of the OWNER if connections or modifications must be made other than during normal working hours, and this will be accomplished at no additional cost to the OWNER.

1.07 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES

A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of the entire work. Upon completion of construction in each individual facility, including testing, if the OWNER, at its sole discretion, desires to accept the individual facility, the CONTRACTOR will be issued a dated certificate of completion and acceptance for each individual facility. The OWNER will assume ownership and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the one-year guaranty period shall commence on that date. The OWNER has the option of not accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work as a whole when it is completed and tested.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION


SECTION 01046

MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to modify existing structures as needed for painting.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Blasting with explosives will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract. Care

shall be taken not to damage any part of existing buildings, foundations and exterior structures both below and above ground.

B. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise

altered except with the express approval of and to the extent approved by the ENGINEER. C. Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and additions shall remain

the property of the OWNER, except that items not salvageable, as determined by the ENGINEER and the OWNER shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR to be disposed of by him off the site of the work at his own place of disposal.

D. All work of altering existing structures shall be done at such time and in such manner as will

comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible before any part of the work is started, all tools, equipment, and materials shall be assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without delay.

E. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations shall conform to the

General Specifications for the classes of work insofar as such specifications are applicable. F. Where holes in existing masonry are required to be sealed, unless otherwise herein specified, they

shall be sealed with cement mortar or concrete. The sides of the openings shall be provided with keyed joints and shall be suitably roughened to furnish a good bond and make a watertight joint. All loose or unsound material adjacent to the opening shall be removed and, if necessary, replaced with new material. The method of placing the mortar seal shall provide a suitable means of releasing entrapped air.

G. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as nearly as possible the

adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Submit Applications for Payment to the ENGINEER in accordance with the schedule established by Conditions of the Contract and the Agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR.

B. The accepted Schedule of Values, Section 01370, shall be used as the basis for the

CONTRACTOR'S Application for Payment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Contract Agreement

B. Section 01300: Submittals

C. Section 01310: Construction Schedules D. Section 01370: Schedule of Values

E. Section 01700: Contract Closeout

1.03 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED

A. Submit applications typed on forms approved by the OWNER, Application for Payment, with itemized data typed on 8-1/2 inch x 11 inch or 8-1/2 inch x 14 inch white paper continuation sheets.

B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet:

1. Format, schedules, line items and values: Those of the Schedule of Values accepted by the ENGINEER.

C. Provide construction photographs in accordance with Section 01300.

1.04 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT

A. Application Form: 1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed prior to date of

submittal of application. 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation

sheets. 3. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of Contract firm.


B. Continuation Sheets: 1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of Work, with item number and scheduled

dollar value for each item. 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been

performed or products stored. a. Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of Values.

3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the end of the continuation sheets. a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original component item of

work. 4. To receive approval for payment on component material stored on site, submit copies of the

original paid invoices with the application for payment. 1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. When the OWNER or the ENGINEER requires substantiating data, CONTRACTOR shall submit suitable information, with a cover letter identifying: 1. Project. 2. Application number and date. 3. Detailed list of enclosures. 4. For stored products:

a. Item number and identification as shown on application. b. Description of specific material.

B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.

C. As a prerequisite for payment, CONTRACTOR is to submit a "Surety Acknowledgement of

Payment Request" letter showing amount of progress payment which the CONTRACTOR is requesting.

D. The CONTRACTOR is to maintain an updated set of drawings to be used as Record Drawings in

accordance with Section 01700. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the CONTRACTOR is to exhibit the updated Record Drawings for review by the OWNER and the ENGINEER.

E. The final set of Record Drawings shall be submitted by the Substantial Completion date. 1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT

A. Fill in Application form as specified for progress payments.

B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.

C. Submit all Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01700.

1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE

A. Submit Applications for Payment to the ENGINEER at the times stipulated in the Agreement.


B. Number: Four copies of each Application. C. When the ENGINEER finds Application properly completed and correct, he will transmit

certificate for payment to OWNER, with copy to CONTRACTOR. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION


SECTION 01170

SPECIAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN

A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER and OWNER a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The plan should outline the necessary measures which the CONTRACTOR proposes to perform at no additional cost to the OWNER in case of a hurricane warning.

B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever ENGINEER shall direct; CONTRACTOR will, and

will cause Subcontractors to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of ENGINEER, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of CONTRACTOR or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of CONTRACTOR.

1.02 RELOCATIONS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including but not limited to light poles, control panels, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, irrigation, conduits and drains that interfere with the positioning of the Work as set out on the Drawings. The cost of all such relocations shall be included in the bid for the project and shall not result in any additional cost to the OWNER.

1.03 OBSTRUCTIONS

A. The attention of the CONTRACTOR is drawn to the fact that during excavation at the Project site, the possibility exists of the CONTRACTOR encountering various water, electrical, or other lines not shown on the Drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate and flag these lines so as to avoid damage to the existing lines. Should damage occur to an existing line, the CONTRACTOR shall repair the line at no cost to the OWNER.

B. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to ensure that all utility or other poles, the stability of

which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation, are temporarily stayed in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the pole and that the utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable advance notice of any such excavation by the CONTRACTOR.

1.04 PROVISIONS FOR THE CONTROL OF DUST

A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the amount of dust created. Wetting down the site may be required or as directed by the ENGINEER to prevent dust as a result of vehicular traffic.

1.05 MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING WATER FACILITIES OPERATION


A. The CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate at all times with the OWNER in order to maintain the operation of the existing facilities with the least amount of interference and interruption possible. Continuous service, public health and safety considerations shall exceed all others and the CONTRACTOR’s schedule, plans and work shall at all times be subject to alteration and revision if necessary for above considerations.

B. The ENGINEER and OWNER reserve the right to require the CONTRACTOR to work 24 hours per day in all cases, where, in their opinion, interference with operation of the system may result.

C. In no case will the CONTRACTOR be permitted to interfere with the existing system until all

materials, supplies, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the interfering portion of the work are on the site.

1.06 EXISTING UTILITY PROTECTION

A. Existing utilities have been shown on the Drawings insofar as information is reasonably available; however, it will be the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to preserve all existing utilities whether shown on the Plans or not. If any existing utility systems are impacted, at the sole discretion of the OWNER, such repairs shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR’s forces or by another contractor retained by the prime CONTRACTOR. Any delays ensuing from this damage will be considered as inexcusable.

1.07 NOISE LIMITATIONS

A. All equipment to be furnished under this Contract, unless specified otherwise in the technical specifications, shall be designed to ensure that the sound pressure level does not exceed 85 decibels over a frequency range of 37.8 to 9600 cycles per second at a distance of three feet from any portion of the equipment, under any load condition, when tested using standard equipment and methods. Noise levels shall include the noise from the motor. Mufflers or external baffles shall not be acceptable for the purpose of reducing noise. Data on noise levels shall be included with the shop drawing submittal.

1.09 WARRANTIES

A. Bid prices for equipment furnished under Divisions 11 through 16 shall include warranties as called for in Section 01740.

1.10 SITE RESTORATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall remove all excess material and shall clean up and restore the site to its original condition or better. All damage, as a result of work under this Contract, done to existing structures, pavement, driveways, paved areas, curbs and gutters, sidewalks, shrubbery, grass, trees, utility poles, utility pipelines, conduits, drains, catch basins, flagstones, rocked, graveled or stabilized areas or driveways and including all obstructions not specifically named herein, shall be repaired.

1.11 EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS AND ACCIDENT REPORTS


A. Emergency phone numbers (fire, medical, police) shall be posted at the CONTRACTOR’s phone and its locations known to all.

B. Accidents shall be reported immediately to the ENGINEER by messenger or phone.

C. All accidents shall be documented and a fully detailed written report submitted to the ENGINEER as soon as possible after each accident.

1.12 ITEMS SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS

A. Items of material, equipment, machinery and the like may be specified on the Drawings and not in the Specifications. Such items shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the Specification on the Drawings.

1.13 TRESPASS ON ADJACENT PROPERTY

A. CONTRACTORS/Subcontractors/Materialmen involved in this project shall not trespass on property adjacent to the work site of this contract. Should trespass occur, all resultant damages shall be paid by the CONTRACTOR. Claims of damage made to the OWNER will be relayed to the CONTRACTOR for resolution. The OWNER reserves the right to withhold from the final payment due to the CONTRACTOR an amount of money equal to twice the estimated damage amount until the resolution of the claim by the CONTRACTOR and the Claimant.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01250

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Measurement Authority B. Schedule of Contract Items C. Payment D. Defect Assessment E. Non-Payment for Rejected Work

1.02 MEASUREMENT AUTHORITY

A. Measurement: The ENGINEER will take all measurements and compute quantities accordingly. B. Assistance: Assistance to the ENGINEER in the form of necessary equipment and qualified

personnel shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR as required for taking measurements.

1.03 DEFINITION OF BID ITEMS

A. “Lump Sum”: The price bid for each Lump Sum Contract Item shall include all costs in connection with the proper and successful completion of the Work, including furnishing all materials, equipment, supplies and appurtenances; providing all construction plant equipment and tools; and performing all necessary labor and supervision and training to fully complete the Work. All Work not specifically set forth as a Contract item in the Bid Form shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the CONTRACTOR and all costs in connection therewith shall be included in the prices bid.

B. Consideration for Indemnification Lump Sum- Payment for consideration for indemnification of the OWNER will be based upon the Lump Sum price named for such work, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Contingency Allowance- The purpose of the Contingency Allowance in the Bid Form is to establish prices for work not included in the Lump Sum that is ordered by the OWNER. No payment shall be made under the Contingency Allowance for work performed by the CONTRACTOR for his own convenience or due to his negligence in executing the work.

1.04 SCHEDULE OF CONTRACT ITEMS

A. Base Bid

1. Contract Item 1 (Lump Sum): All Work to Complete Project:


a. Under this Contract Item, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment

and services, and do all work for the construction, maintenance, maintaining plant operations, testing and placing in trouble-free operation all structures, equipment piping and appurtenances (except as noted in the allowances below). The work includes digging all excavations, constructing all structures, furnishing and installing all equipment, placing all backfill and embankment, and all general, structural, architectural, mechanical, plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and electrical and instrumentation work complete and in place, together with all appurtenant work as shown on the Drawings, specified and all other requirements of the General Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements and directed by the ENGINEER.

b. Lump sum unit of measure and payment.

Preliminary work, including submission of a project schedule, schedule of values, submittals, submittal schedule, and other documents required for permitting, and performance of work that does not require permits.

Allowance for the CONTRACTOR to pay permit fees. The payment will be based on actual permit fees only, without markup by the contractor.

1.05 PAYMENT

A. Payment Includes: Full compensation for all required labor, products tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection or application of an Item of the Works, overhead and profit.

1.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the

ENGINEER will direct that the defective Work may remain or be partially replaced and the price will be adjusted to a new price at the discretion of the OWNER.

1.07 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS

A. Payment will not be made for any of the following:

1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement 3. Products not completely unloaded from the vehicle 4. Products placed beyond the lines and grades of the required Work 5. CONTRACTOR supplied products remaining on hand after completion of the Work


6. Loading, hauling and disposing of rejected products

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. This Section specifies the general methods and requirements of submissions applicable to the following work-related submittals: Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, Mock Ups, and Construction Photographs. Detailed submittal requirements will be specified in the technical specifications sections.

B All submittals shall be clearly identified by reference to Specification Section, Paragraph,

Drawing No. or Detail as applicable. Submittals shall be clear and legible and of sufficient size for sufficient presentation of data.

C. The CONTRACTOR is to maintain an accurate updated submittal log and will bring this log to

each scheduled progress meeting with the OWNER and the ENGINEER. This log should include the following items:

1. Submittal-Description and File Number assigned. 2. Date to ENGINEER. 3. Date returned to CONTRACTOR (from ENGINEER). 4. Status of Submittal (Approved/Resubmit/Rejected). 5. Date of Resubmittal and Return (as applicable). 6. Date material released (for fabrication). 7. Projected date of fabrication. 8. Projected date of delivery to site.

1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, SAMPLES

A. Shop Drawings

1. Shop drawings as specified herein include, but are not necessarily limited to, custom-prepared data such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) drawings, scheduled information, setting diagrams, actual shopwork manufacturing instructions, custom templates, special wiring diagrams, coordination drawings, individual system or equipment inspection and test reports including performance curves and certifications, as applicable to the Work.

2. All shop drawings submitted by subcontractors for approval shall be sent directly to the CONTRACTOR for checking. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for their submission at the proper time so as to prevent delays in delivery of materials.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall check all subcontractors’ shop drawings regarding measurements, size of members, materials, and details to satisfy himself that they conform to the intent of the Drawings and Specifications. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or


otherwise in error shall be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission thereof.

4. All details on shop drawings submitted for approval shall show clearly the relation of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon field measurements. Such measurements shall be made and noted on the drawings before being submitted for approval.

5. Facsimiles or copies of facsimiles will not be accepted for review.

B. Product Data

1. Product data as specified in individual Sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the MANUFACTURER's product specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, MANUFACTURER's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing-in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring diagrams, printed performance curves and operational-range diagrams, production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended spare-parts listing, and printed product warranties, as applicable to the Work.

C. Samples

1. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, for the approval of the ENGINEER, samples required by the Contract Documents or requested by the ENGINEER. Samples shall be delivered to the ENGINEER as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes as specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted unless otherwise specified. The CONTRACTOR shall prepay all shipping charges on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not be used in work until approved by the ENGINEER.

2. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of repetitively-used products, color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets, specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work to be used by the ENGINEER or OWNER for independent inspection and testing, as applicable to the Work.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare a transmittal letter in triplicate for each shipment of samples. He shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment and send a copy of this letter to the ENGINEER. Approval of a sample shall be only for the characteristics or use named in such approval and shall not be construed to change or modify any Contract Requirements.

4. Approved samples not destroyed in testing shall be sent to the ENGINEER or stored at the site of the work. Approved samples of the hardware in good condition will be marked for identification and may be used in the work. Materials and equipment incorporated in work shall match the approved samples. Samples which fail testing or are not approved will be returned to the CONTRACTOR at his expense, if so requested at time of submission.

1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES


A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the ENGINEER a schedule of shop drawing submittals fixing the respective dates for the submission of shop and working drawings, the beginning of manufacture, testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. This schedule shall indicate those that are critical to the progress schedule. This schedule shall be submitted within 14 days of the effective date of the Agreement.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall review shop drawings, product data and samples, including those by

subcontractors, prior to submission to determine and verify the following: 1. Field measurements 2. Field construction criteria 3. Catalog numbers and similar data 4. Conformance with the Specifications

C. Each shop drawing, sample and product data submitted by the CONTRACTOR shall have

affixed to it the following Certification Statement including the CONTRACTOR's Company name and signed by the CONTRACTOR: "Certification Statement: by this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings and all Contract requirements." Shop drawings and product data sheets 11-in x 17-in and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and bear the above Certification Statement on the cover sheet. The transmittal cover sheet for each identified shop drawing shall fully describe the packaged data and include a listing of all items within the package. Provide to the Resident Project Representative a copy of each submittal transmittal sheet for shop drawings, product data and samples at the time of submittal of said drawings, product data and samples to the ENGINEER.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize a 10-character submittal identification numbering system in

the following manner:

1. The first character shall be a D, S, P, M, or R, which represents Shop/Working Drawing and other Product Data (D), Sample (S), Preliminary Submittal (P), Operating/Maintenance Manual (M), or Request for Information (R).

2. The next five digits shall be the applicable Specification Section Number. 3. The next three digits shall be the numbers 001-999 to sequentially number each initial

separate item or drawing submitted under each specific Section number. 4. The last character shall be a letter, A-Z, indicating the submission, or resubmission of the

same Drawing, i.e., "A=1st submission, B=2nd submission, C=3d submission, etc. A typical submittal number would be as follows:

D-03300-008-B

D = Shop Drawing 03300 = Specification Section for Concrete 008 = The eighth initial submittal under this specification section B. = The second submission (first resubmission) of that particular shop drawing

E. Notify the ENGINEER in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittals

from the requirements of the Contract Documents.


F. The review and approval of shop drawings, samples or product data by the ENGINEER shall

not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All risks of error and omission are assumed by the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER will have no responsibility therefore.

G. No portion of the work requiring a shop drawing, sample, or product data shall be started nor

shall any materials be fabricated or installed prior to the approval or qualified approval of such item. Fabrication performed, materials purchased or on-site construction accomplished which does not conform to approved shop drawings and data shall be at the CONTRACTOR's risk. The OWNER will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies required to accomplish conformity.

H. Project work, materials, fabrication, and installation shall conform with approved shop

drawings, applicable samples, and product data. 1.04 SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS

A. Make submittals promptly in accordance with a concurred schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor.

B. All submittals shall be sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide no less

than 14 calendar days for review from the time the ENGINEER receives them.

C. Number of submittals required: 1. Shop Drawings: Five copies. 2. Product Data: Five copies. 3. Samples: Submit the number stated in the respective Specification Sections.

D. Submittals shall contain:

1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions. 2. The Project title and number. 3. CONTRACTOR identification. 4. The names of:

a. CONTRACTOR b. Supplier c. MANUFACTURER

5. Identification of the product, with the specification section number, page and paragraph(s). 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials. 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 11. An 8-in x 3-in blank space for CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER stamps.

1.05 REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND

SAMPLES


A. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. They shall not be construed: 1. as permitting any departure from the Contract requirements; 2. as relieving the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for any errors, including details,

dimensions, and materials; 3. as approving departures from details furnished by the ENGINEER, except as otherwise

provided herein.

B. The CONTRACTOR remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for performing work in a safe manner.

C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and show a departure

from the Contract requirements which ENGINEER finds to be in the interest of the OWNER and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or time for performance, the ENGINEER may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception.

D. Submittals will be returned to the CONTRACTOR under one of the following codes.

Code 1 - "APPROVED" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal.

When returned under this code the CONTRACTOR may release the equipment and/or material for manufacture.

Code 2 - "APPROVED AS NOTED". This code is assigned when a confirmation of the

notations and comments IS NOT required by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product.

Code 3 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/CONFIRM". This combination of codes is assigned when

a confirmation of the notations and comments IS required by the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. This confirmation shall specifically address each omission and nonconforming item that was noted. Confirmation is to be received by the ENGINEER within 30 calendar days of the date of the ENGINEER's transmittal requiring the confirmation.

Code 4 - "APPROVED AS NOTED/RESUBMIT". This combination of codes is assigned

when notations and comments are extensive enough to require a resubmittal of the entire package. The CONTRACTOR may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. This resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and non-conforming items that were noted. Resubmittal is to be received by the ENGINEER within 30 calendar days of the date of the ENGINEER's transmittal requiring the resubmittal.

Code 5 - "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent of the

Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the submittal into conformance. It may be necessary to resubmit using a different MANUFACTURER/vendor to meet the Contract Documents.


Code 6 - "COMMENTS ATTACHED" is assigned where there are comments attached to the

returned submittal which provide additional data to aid the CONTRACTOR.

Code 7 - "RECEIPT ACKNOWLEDGED” is assigned to acknowledge receipt of a submittal that is not subject to the ENGINEER’s review and approval and is being filed for informational purposes only. This code is generally used in acknowledged receipt of means and methods of construction work plans, field conformance test reports and health and safety plans.

Codes 1 through 5 designate the status of the reviewed submittal with Code 6 showing there has been an attachment of additional data.

Code 7 is used as may be necessary.

E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On resubmittals the

CONTRACTOR shall direct specific attention, in writing on the letter of transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision triangles or other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the ENGINEER, on previous submissions. Any such revisions which are not clearly identified shall be made at the risk of the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall make corrections to any work done because of this type revision that is not in accordance to the Contract Documents as may be required by the ENGINEER.

F. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The ENGINEER will be the only judge as to the

completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be returned to the CONTRACTOR, and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted. The ENGINEER may at his option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the CONTRACTOR to the areas that are incomplete.

G. Repetitive Review - Shop drawings and other submittals will be reviewed no more than two

times at the OWNER's expense. All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the ENGINEER and at the CONTRACTOR's expense, based on the ENGINEER's then prevailing rates. The CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for all such fees invoiced to the OWNER by the ENGINEER. Submittals are required until approved.

H. If the CONTRACTOR considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to constitute a

change to the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall give written notice thereof to the ENGINEER at least seven working days prior to release for manufacture.

I. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, the

CONTRACTOR shall carry out the construction in accordance therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the ENGINEER.

J. Only the ENGINEER will utilize the color "red" in marking submittals.

K. Before final payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish to ENGINEER one (1) set of

Record Shop Drawings.


L. Request For Information (RFI) shall be submitted on a standard form provided by the ENGINEER. RFIs shall indicate their importance to the timely completion of the project. RFIs will be processed as a shop drawing with 21 days allowed for review time.

1.06 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute reproductions of approved shop drawings and copies of approved product data and samples, where required, to the job site file and elsewhere as directed by the ENGINEER. Number of copies shall be as directed by the ENGINEER but shall not exceed 8. Engineer will retain 5 copies.

1.07 MOCK UPS

A. Mock Up units as specified in individual Sections include but are not necessarily limited to,

complete units of the standard of acceptance for that type of work to be used on the Project. Remove at the completion of the Work or when directed.

1.08 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall have an average of 24 color photographs per month made of the work during its progress (6 views, 4 photographs per view) and 24 color photographs of the completed facilities (6 views, 4 photographs per view). The photographs shall be of such views and taken at such times as the ENGINEER directs.

B. Each photograph shall have attached to the backing a paper label, approximately 2-1/4-in wide

by 1-3/4-in high containing thereon in neat lettering: 1. CONTRACTOR's name 2. Short Description of View 3. Photo No. and Date Taken 4. Photographer's Firm Name

C. CONTRACTOR shall also provide two electronic CD-ROM disks each with a proof set of all photographs in .JPG format to the ENGINEER each month.

1.09 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination of Submittal Times: Prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections, of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times including disapproval and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery and similar sequenced activities. No extension of time will be authorized because of the CONTRACTOR's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)


END OF SECTION


SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER for review, a practical and feasible schedule, showing the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, and the dates upon which he proposes to start and complete each of the salient features, including the dates for submittals and approval of samples and shop drawings, and the procurement of materials, plant and equipment. The Construction schedule shall consist of a critical path network showing contemplated completion percentages and arranged to record actual completion percentages at stated intervals. .

B. The Construction schedule shall be kept up-to-date and the current updated schedule shall be

submitted to the ENGINEER monthly with the request for payment. If the CONTRACTOR fails to submit the required updated schedule within the time prescribed, the ENGINEER shall not make recommendation of progress payment estimates until such time as the CONTRACTOR submits the required updated schedule.

C. The Construction schedule shall in general determine the order in which the Work is to proceed.

The ENGINEER, however, may order and authorize minor changes of this schedule whenever such changes are of definite advantage to the OWNER or necessary for the operations of the OWNER.

D. The schedule shall include the individual activities associated with Substantial Completion, and

Final Inspection, and readiness for Final Payment as required by the General and Supplementary Conditions and Contract Closeout procedures.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01010: Summary of Work.

B. Section 01300: Submittals.

C. Section 01700: Contract Closeout. 1.03 CRITICAL PATH METHOD CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit within fifteen (15) days after the Effective Date of the Agreement, a schedule indicating planned operations during the contract. Cost of activities expected to be completed or partially completed before submission and concurrence of the whole schedule shall be included.

1.04 PROGRESS REPORTING


A. Progress under the current CPM schedule shall be evaluated monthly by the CONTRACTOR

and the ENGINEER. Not less than seven days prior to each monthly progress meeting, they shall meet at the job site and jointly evaluate the status of each activity on which work has started or is due to start, based on the preceding CPM schedule; to show actual progress, to identify those activities started and those completed during the previous period, to show the estimated time required to complete or the percent complete of each activity started but not yet completed and to reflect any changes indicated for the network. Activities shall not be considered to be complete until they are, in fact, 100 percent complete.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall produce from this evaluation five (5) copies of an updated computer-

generated CPM schedule (color copies), tabular activities reports, and CPM Status Report for the project, with electronic files on CD-ROMs.

C. At each progress meeting, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a narrative report based on the

CPM schedule evaluation described above, in a format agreed upon by the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER. The report shall include a description of the progress during the previous period in terms of completed activities, an explanation of each activity which is showing a delay, a description of problem areas, current and anticipated delaying factors and their estimated impact on performance of other activities and completion dates and an explanation of corrective action taken or proposed. This report, as well as the CPM Status Report, will be discussed at each progress meeting.

1.05 LOOK-AHEAD REPORTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall also submit three-week look-ahead reports at each scheduled

Progress meeting and at any time specifically directed by the OWNER or ENGINEER. 1.06 CASH FLOW CHARTS A. A cash flow chart comparing the actual cash flow against projected cash flow and a cash flow

table containing monthly and cumulative expenditures. 1.07 DISTRIBUTION

A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to:

1. ENGINEER (three copies). 2. Job site file. 3. Subcontractors. 4. Other concerned parties. 5. OWNER (two copies).

B. Instruct recipients to report promptly to the CONTRACTOR, in writing, any problems

anticipated by the projections shown in the schedules. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SCHEDULE COMPLIANCE

A. The CONTRACTOR agrees that whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly CPM schedule and CPM Status Report that delays to the critical path have resulted, and hence, that the contract completion date will not be met or when so directed by the ENGINEER, he will take some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the OWNER, submitting to the ENGINEER for concurrence, a written statement of the steps he intends to take to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the concurrence schedule.

1. Increased construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially

eliminate, in the judgment of the ENGINEER, the backlog of work. 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working days per week, the

amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate, in the judgment of the ENGINEER, the backlog of work.

3. Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule.

4. Costs incurred by the OWNER arising from such lengthening of hours, including furnishing of Inspectors, shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility and shall be deducted from monies due him. Failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with the requirements of the ENGINEER may be grounds for determination by the OWNER that the CONTRACTOR is not proceeding at such rates as will insure completion within the specified time and may result in the termination of the right of the CONTRACTOR to continue the work.

3.02 ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT SCHEDULE AND COMPLETION TIME

A. If the CONTRACTOR desires to make changes in his method of operating which affect the concurred CPM schedule, he shall notify the ENGINEER in writing stating what CPM changes are proposed and the reason for the change. If the ENGINEER concurs with these changes, the CONTRACTOR shall revise and submit for concurrence, without additional cost to the OWNER, all of the affected portions of the CPM network. The CPM schedule shall be adjusted by the CONTRACTOR only after prior concurrence of his proposed changes by the ENGINEER.

B. Adjustments may consist of changing portions of the activity sequence and/or activity durations,

division of concurred activities, or other adjustments as may be concurred by the ENGINEER. The addition of extraneous, non-working activities and/or activities which add unapproved restraints to the CPM schedule shall not be concurred.

C. If the completion of any activity, whether or not critical, falls more than one hundred percent

(100%) behind its concurred duration, the CONTRACTOR shall submit for concurrence a schedule adjustment showing each such activity divided into two activities reflecting completed versus uncompleted work.

D. Shop drawings which are not approved on the first submittal or within the schedule time shall

be immediately rescheduled, as well as pipelines and tanks which do not pass leak tests.


E. The contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this contract. In the

event the CONTRACTOR requests an extension of any contract completion date, he shall furnish such justification and supporting evidence as the ENGINEER may deem necessary for a determination as to whether the CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the provisions of this contract. ENGINEER will, after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence make findings of fact and will advise the CONTRACTOR in writing thereof. If the ENGINEER finds that the CONTRACTOR is entitled to any extension of any contract completion date under the provisions of this contract, the ENGINEER's determination as to the total number of days extension shall be based upon the currently concurred CPM schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. Such data shall be included in the next monthly updating of the schedule. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that actual delays in activities which, according to the CPM schedule, do not affect any contract completion date shown by the critical path in the network do not have any effect on the contract completion date or dates, and therefore, will not be the basis for a change therein.

F. From time to time it may be necessary for the contract schedule and/or completion time to be

adjusted by the ENGINEER to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the OWNER or his representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments and/or completion time extension. Under such conditions, the CONTRACTOR shall reschedule the work and/or contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions and the CONTRACTOR shall revise his schedule accordingly. No additional compensation shall be made to the CONTRACTOR for such schedule changes except for unavoidable overall contract time extensions beyond the actual completion of all unaffected work in the contract, in which case the CONTRACTOR shall take all possible action to minimize any time extension and any additional cost to the OWNER. It is specifically pointed out that the use of available float time in the CPM schedule may be used by the OWNER as defined by the ENGINEER, as well as by the CONTRACTOR. Float time is defined as the amount of time between the early start date, and the late start date, or the early finish date and the late finish date, of any of the activities in the schedule.

G. The OWNER controls the float time in the concurred CPM network and, therefore, without

obligation to extend either the overall completion date or any intermediate completion dates set out in the CPM network, the OWNER may initiate changes to the contract work that absorb float time only. OWNER-initiated changes that affect the critical path on the concurred CPM network shall be the sole grounds for extending (or contracting) said completion dates. CONTRACTOR-initiated changes that encroach on the float time identified in the concurred CPM network may be accomplished with the OWNER's concurrence. Such changes, however, shall give way to OWNER-initiated changes competing for the same float time.

H. Submittals which show completion ahead of the contract time shall include additional

supporting data to explain the basis of the shorter time for performance. Such supporting data may include, but not limited to, any deviations from the contract documents, quantities, production rates, activity man-day requirements, hours per shift which are proposed, the work days per week, and a listing of the major items of construction equipment planned for use on the work. The equipment listing shall include type, number of units, unit capacities, and a schedule showing the proposed time each piece of equipment will be used. Activities which may be expedited and accelerated by use of overtime or additional shifts shall be identified and explained. Upon receipt of supporting data, the ENGINEER and OWNER will review and either concur or disagree with the submittal. Concurrence will recognize that the earlier finish


date has float time with respect to the Contract time, which float can be shared if accepted by the OWNER, but it will not constitute a basis for a change in Contract price and Contract time.

3.03 COORDINATING SCHEDULES WITH OTHER CONTRACT SCHEDULES

A. Where work is to be performed under this contract concurrently with and/or contingent upon work performed on the same facilities or area under other contracts, the CONTRACTOR's CPM schedule shall be coordinated with the schedules of the other contracts. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the schedules of the other appropriate contracts from the ENGINEER for the preparation and updating of his CPM schedule and shall be make the required changes in his schedule when indicated by changes in corresponding schedules.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Submit to the ENGINEER a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, within 14 days after the effective date of the Agreement.

B. Upon request of the ENGINEER, support the values with data which will substantiate their

correctness. C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the CONTRACTOR's

Applications for Payment. 1.02 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Submit schedule on letter size white bond paper including, as a minimum: 1. Title of Project and location. 2. ENGINEER and Project number. 3. Name and Address of CONTRACTOR. 4. Contract designation. 5. Date of submission.

B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to

serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. C. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the

specifications.

D. For each major line item list sub-values of major products or operations under the item. E. For the various portions of the Work:

1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the CONTRACTOR's overhead and

profit. 2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the

value into:

a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. Paid invoices are required for materials upon request by the ENGINEER.

b. The total installed value.

F. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum.


1.03 SUBSCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES

A. Submit a sub-schedule of unit costs and quantities for products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products.

B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the

same as the line item in the Schedule of Values. C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste. D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into:

1. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid. 2. Copies of invoices for component material shall be included with the payment request in

which the material first appears. 3. Paid invoices shall be provided with the second payment request in which the material

appears or no payment shall be allowed and/or may be deleted from the request.

E. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item in the Schedule of Values.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01505 CONTROL OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PLANT

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish personnel and equipment which will be efficient, appropriate and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of progress which will ensure the completion of the Work within the time stipulated in the Proposal. If at any time such personnel appears to the ENGINEER to be inefficient, inappropriate or insufficient for securing the quality of work required or for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the CONTRACTOR to increase the efficiency, change the character or increase the personnel and equipment, and the CONTRACTOR shall conform to such order. Failure of the ENGINEER to give such order shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR of his obligations to secure the quality of the Work and rate of progress required.

1.02 PRIVATE LAND

A. The CONTRACTOR shall not enter or occupy private land outside of the construction site, except by permission of the owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT

A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this Contract shall cooperate with the CONTRACTOR and his subcontractors or trades, and shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or required.

B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by the trade or

subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated herein or directed by the ENGINEER.

3.02 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT

A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury in any way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads on it shall be allowed and all portions injured shall be reconstructed by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense.

B. All structures shall be protected in a manner approved by the ENGINEER. Should any of the

floors or other parts of the structures become heaved, cracked or otherwise damaged, all such damaged portions of the Work shall be completely repaired and made good by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. If, in the final inspection of the Work, any defects, faults or omissions are found, the CONTRACTOR shall cause the same to be repaired or removed and replaced by proper materials and workmanship


without extra compensation for the materials and labor required. Further, the CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the satisfactory maintenance and repair of the construction and other work undertaken herein, for at least the guarantee period described in the Contract.

C. Further, the CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage to any

structure due to water pressure during and after construction and until such structure is accepted and taken over by the OWNER.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENT INCLUDED

A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by

the ENGINEER. 3. Manufactured and Fabricated Products:

a) Design, fabricate and assemble in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices.

b) Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be interchangeable.

c) Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same MANUFACTURER. d) Products shall be suitable for service conditions. e) Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless

variations are specifically approved in writing.

4. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or is specified.


A. Section 01010: Summary of Work. B. Section 01170: Special Provisions. C. Section 01710: Cleaning. D. Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds.

1.03 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS

A. Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Work except for those items

specified herein for rehabilitation and/or relocation. All materials and equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR shall be subject to the inspection and approval of the ENGINEER. No material shall be delivered to the work without prior approval of the ENGINEER.

B. Within thirty (30) days after the effective date of the Agreement, the CONTRACTOR shall

submit to the ENGINEER, data relating to materials and equipment he proposes to furnish for the Work. Such data shall be in sufficient detail to enable the ENGINEER to identify the particular product and to form an opinion as to its conformity to the Specifications. The data shall comply with this section.


C. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR. If the ENGINEER requires, either prior to beginning or during the progress of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall submit samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary to demonstrate that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Except as otherwise noted, the OWNER will make arrangements for and pay for the tests.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit consideration and

approval before materials are necessary for incorporation in the Work. Any delay of approval resulting from the CONTRACTOR's failure to submit samples or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claim against the OWNER or the ENGINEER.

E. In order to demonstrate the proficiency of workmen or to facilitate the choice among several

textures, types, finishes, and surfaces, the CONTRACTOR shall provide such samples of workmanship or finish as may be required.

F. The materials and equipment used on the Work shall correspond to the approved samples or other

data. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION

A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with MANUFACTURER's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including five copies to the ENGINEER.\

1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion. B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such

instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with MANUFACTURER's

instructions, consult with ENGINEER for further instructions. 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions.

C. Perform work in accordance with MANUFACTURER's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

1.05 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in MANUFACTURER's original containers or

packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of

Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that Products are properly protected and undamaged.


B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to Products or packaging.

1.06 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a covered, weather-protected storage structure providing a clean, dry, non-corrosive environment for all mechanical equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for storage" of each equipment supplier and MANUFACTURER including connection of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. Corroded, damaged or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment estimate.

B. Store Products in accordance with MANUFACTURER's instructions, with seals and labels intact

and legible. 1. Store Products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by MANUFACTURER's

instructions. 3. Store fabricated Products above the ground, on blocking or skids, prevent soiling or staining.

Cover Products which are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings. Provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation.

4. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter.

C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work shall be handled and stored by the

CONTRACTOR before, during, and after shipment in a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment.

D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept

completely dry at all times. All structural, miscellaneous steel and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast concrete beams shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking, and spalling to a minimum.

E. All materials which, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, have become so damaged as to be unfit

for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the Work, and the CONTRACTOR shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal.

F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make periodic inspections of

stored Products to assure that Products are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration.


G. Protection After Installation: Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed Products from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Remove covering when no longer needed.

H. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies sold and

delivered to the OWNER under this Contract until final inspection of the Work and acceptance thereof by the OWNER. In the event any such material, equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final inspection and acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall replace same without additional cost to the OWNER.

I. Should the CONTRACTOR fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice to do so has been given, the OWNER retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the CONTRACTOR's Contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections.

1.07 PRODUCTS

A. Products List: 1. Within thirty (30) days after the effective date of the Agreement, submit to the ENGINEER a

complete list of major Products proposed to be used, with the name of the MANUFACTURER and the installing subcontractor.

B. CONTRACTOR's Options:

1. For Products specified only by reference standard, select any Product meeting that standard. 2. For Products specified by naming several Products or MANUFACTURERS, select any one

of the Products or MANUFACTURERS named, which complies with the specifications. 3. For Products specified by naming one or more Products or MANUFACTURERS and "or

equal", CONTRACTOR must submit a request as for substitutions for any Product or MANUFACTURER not specifically named.

C. Substitutions:

1. For a period of thirty (30) days after the effective date of the Agreement, the ENGINEER will

consider written requests from CONTRACTOR for substitution of Products. 2. Submit a separate request for each Product, supported with complete data, with drawings and

samples as appropriate, including:

a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that specified. b. Changes required in other elements of the Work because of the substitution. c. Effect on the construction schedule. d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the Product specified. e. Any required license fees or royalties. f. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement materials.

3. The OWNER shall be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution based on the

recommendation of the ENGINEER.


4. No substitutions will be considered by the ENGINEER after 30 days from the effective date of the Agreement.

D. CONTRACTOR's Representation:

1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that CONTRACTOR:

a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified.

b. Will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the Product specified.

c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and make such other changes as may be required to make the Work complete in all respects.

d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, which may subsequently become apparent.

E. The OWNER will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness based on the

recommendation of the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall notify CONTRACTOR, in writing, of the decision to accept or reject the requested substitution.

1.08 SPECIAL TOOLS

A. MANUFACTURERS of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their use. The CONTRACTOR shall preserve and deliver to the OWNER these tools and instructions in good order no later than upon completion of the Contract.

1.09 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT ON SITE

A. Because of the restricted site conditions, special attention shall be given to the storage and handling of equipment on site. As a minimum, the procedure outlined below shall be followed: 1. Equipment shall not be shipped until approved by the ENGINEER. The intent of this

requirement is to reduce storage time prior to installation and/or operation. Under no circum stances shall equipment be delivered to the site more than one month prior to installation without written authorization from the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall take all reasonable measures to schedule deliveries of equipment so that it may be incorporated in the work shortly after being received.

2. All equipment having moving parts such as gears, electric motors, etc. and/or instruments shall be stored in a temperature and humidity controlled building approved by the ENGINEER, until such time as the equipment is to be installed.

3. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, etc. unless otherwise instructed by the MANUFACTURER.

4. MANUFACTURER's storage instructions shall be carefully studied by the CONTRACTOR and reviewed with the ENGINEER by him. These instructions shall be carefully followed and a written record of this kept by the CONTRACTOR.

5. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal-to-metal "welding". Upon installation of the equipment, the CONTRACTOR


shall start the equipment, at least half load, once weekly for an adequate period of time to ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use.

6. Lubricants shall be changed upon completion of installation and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. Mechanical equipment to be used in the Work, if stored for longer than ninety (90) days, shall have the bearings cleaned, flushed and lubricated prior to testing and startup, at no extra cost to the OWNER.

7. Prior to acceptance of the equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall have the MANUFACTURER inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the MANUFACTURER shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the MANU-FACTURER to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the MANUFACTURER will guarantee the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense.

8. All painting products, sealants, waterproofing compounds, and other similar liquid/semi-liquid products shall be stored in contained and secure areas provided by the CONTRACTOR in accordance wit the material manufacturer’s or supplier’s recommendations and all applicable local, state, and federal laws and regulations.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment MANUFACTURER as specified in Section 01740.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01625

PLANT START-UP PART 1 GENERAL – 1.01 NOT USED 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01010: Summary of Work. B. Section 01300: Submittals C. Section 01700: Contract Closeout D. Individual Specification Section’s specific requirements for start-up

PART 2 MATERIALS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT STARTUP (NOT USED) 3.02 FIELD TESTS

A. Field tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the contract and to establish compliance with the technical provision. The test shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR as herein specified. All sewers, water lines, piping, and equipment shall be tested in the field in the presence of the ENGINEER, in the manner prescribed in the Sections of these Specifications pertaining to such installation.

3.03 CORRECTIONS TO THE WORK

A. CONTRACTOR shall correct any items of work failing to meet the specified requirements at no cost to the OWNER. Correct the nonconforming items by rework, modification or replacement as directed by the ENGINEER. All corrected items shall be retested at no additional cost.

3.04 FUNCTIONAL TEST

A. Demonstrate functional testing of all affected equipment without interruption or failure as a

prerequisite to the Date of Substantial Completion.

B. CONTRACTOR Responsibilities

1. Correct any outstanding punchlist items prior to the test. 2. Provide to the ENGINEER a list of 24 hours “on call” representative supervisory persons

who will monitor the performance testing and serve as liaison for the ENGINEER and OWNER.

3. Provide the necessary craft or labor assistance, in the event of an emergency equipment


failure requiring immediate attention (emergency is defined as a failure of function which precludes the further operation of a critical segment of; or the whole of the work) with a response time of not less than four hours from the time of notification.

4. Provide necessary Supplier’s representatives and operating supplies for retesting systems that

fail to pass the initial performance tests due to deficiencies in products or workmanship at no additional cost to the ENGINEER and OWNER.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01700

PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Comply with requirements stated in the construction Contract and in Specifications for administrative procedures in closing out the Work.


A. Agreement.

B. The respective sections of Specifications: C. Closeout Submittals Required of Trades.

1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. When the CONTRACTOR considers the Work Substantially Complete, he shall submit to the ENGINEER a written notice that the Work is substantially complete.

B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the ENGINEER will make an inspection to determine the status of completion.

C. Should the ENGINEER determine that the Work is not Substantially Complete:

1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing, giving the reasons thereof.

2. CONTRACTOR shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a second written notice of substantial completion to the ENGINEER.

3. The ENGINEER will reinspect the Work.

D. When the ENGINEER finds that the Work is Substantially Complete, he will: 1. Prepare and deliver to OWNER a tentative Certificate of Substantial Completion, with a

tentative list of items to be completed or corrected before final payment. 2. After consideration of any objections made by the OWNER as provided in Conditions of

the Contract, and when the ENGINEER considers the Work substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected.

3. Request the CONTRACTOR to initiate closeout submittals. 1.04 FINAL INSPECTION

A. When CONTRACTOR considers the Work is complete, he shall submit written certification that: 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.


3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the OWNER's representative

and are operational. 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection.

B. The ENGINEER will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with reasonable

promptness after receipt of such certification.

C. Should the ENGINEER consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 1. The ENGINEER will promptly notify the CONTRACTOR in writing, listing the

incomplete or defective work. 2. CONTRACTOR shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies, and send a

second written certification to the ENGINEER that the Work is complete. 3. The ENGINEER will reinspect the Work.

D. When the ENGINEER finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract Documents, he shall

request the CONTRACTOR to complete any remaining closeout submittals. 1.05 REINSPECTION FEES

A. Should the ENGINEER perform re-inspections due to failure of the Work to comply with the claims of status of completion made by the CONTRACTOR: 1. OWNER will compensate the ENGINEER for such additional services. 2. OWNER will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to the

CONTRACTOR. 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER

A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities.

B. Project Record Documents.

C. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens

D. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations.


1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS

A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the ENGINEER.

B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum: 1. The original Contract Sum. 2. Additions and deductions resulting from:

a. Previous Change Orders. b. Allowances. c. Unit Prices. d. Deductions for uncorrected Work. e. Penalties and Bonuses. f. Deductions for liquidated damages. g. Deductions for re-inspection payments. h. Inspection overtime i. Excessive shop drawing review cost by the ENGINEER j. Other adjustments.

3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 4. Previous payments. 5. Sum remaining due.

C. ENGINEER will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to the Contract

Sum which were not previously made by Change Orders. 1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with procedures and requirements stated in the Contract for Construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01710

CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Execute cleaning, during progress of the work, and at completion of the work. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Each Section: Cleaning for specific products or work. 1.03 DISPOSAL AND CLEANING

A. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations and anti-pollution laws.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces.

B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of the surface

material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.

B. Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal

disposal areas away from the site. 3.02 DUST CONTROL

A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as-needed basis until painting is finished.

B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not

fall on wet or newly-coated surfaces.


3.03 FINAL CLEANING

A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign

materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Prior to final completion, or OWNER occupancy, conduct an inspection of sight-exposed interior

and exterior surfaces and all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean. END OF SECTION


SECTION 01720

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Maintain at the site for the OWNER one record copy of: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. ENGINEER's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples. 7. Field Test records. 8. Construction photographs. 9. Field engineering records for compliance with field engineering submittals. 10. Update Project Schedule


A. Section 01152: Applications for Payment. 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in CONTRACTOR's field office apart from documents used for

construction.

1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples.

B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI/CSC format. C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record

documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the ENGINEER. E. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the CONTRACTOR is to exhibit the currently

updated "record documents" for review by the ENGINEER and the OWNER. 1.04 MARKING DEVICES

A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code designated by the ENGINEER.

1.05 RECORDING

A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters.


B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. C. Record Drawings; Legibly mark to record actual “As-built” construction:

1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. All underground piping with elevations and dimensions. Changes to piping location.

Horizontal and vertical locations of under ground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. Actual installed pipe material, class, etc.

3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure.

4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 6. Details not on original contract drawings. 7. Equipment and piping relocations. 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors, windows, etc. 9. Architectural schedule changes according to CONTRACTOR's records and shop drawings. 10. Bronze tablet plaque revisions according to actual installation.

D. Specifications and Addenda; Legibly mark each Section to record: 1. MANUFACTURER, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each Product and item of

equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.

E. Shop Drawings (after final review and approval): 1. Two (2) sets of record shop drawings for each process equipment, piping, (including casings)

electrical system and instrumentation system. 1.06 SUBMITTAL

A. Submit initial Record Documents to the ENGINEER with Request for Substantial Completion. B. Submit final Record Documents to ENGINEER for the OWNER with claim for Final Completion

and Readiness for Final Payment. C. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:

1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. CONTRACTOR's name and address. 4. Title and number of each Record Document. 5. Signature of CONTRACTOR or his authorized representative.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section includes procedural requirements for compiling and submitting operation and maintenance data required to complete the project.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Submittals are included in Section 01300. B. Contract closeout is covered in Section 01700. C. Warranties and Bonds are covered in Section 01740.

1.03 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS' REPRESENTATIVE (NOT USED) 1.04 OPERATING MANUALS (NOT USED) 1.05 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME (NOT USED) 1.06 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES (NOT USED) 1.07 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS (NOT USED) 1.08 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL (NOT USED) 1.09 ENGINEER’S O&M REVIEW CHECKLIST

A. The ENGINEER will review Operation and Maintenance manuals submittals on operating equipment for conformance with the requirement of this Section.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 01740

WARRANTIES AND BONDS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract Documents, including Manufacturer’s standard warranties on products and special warranties.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01700: Contract Closeout.

B. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations that are specified to be warranted are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit written warranties to the ENGINEER for review and transmittal to OWNER prior to the date fixed for Substantial Completion. If the Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Owner.

B. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the OWNER, by separate agreement with the CONTRACTOR during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the OWNER within fifteen days of completion of that designated portion of the Work.

C. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the OWNER for approval prior to final execution.

D. Refer to individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for specific content requirements, and particular requirements for submittal of special warranties.

1.04 WARRANTIES

A. All equipment supplied under these Specifications shall be warranted by the CONTRACTOR and the equipment Manufacturer for a period of one (1) year. Warranty period shall commence on the date of OWNER acceptance.

B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials.

If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced in the machine(s) and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the OWNER.


C. The Manufacturer’s warranty period shall run concurrently with the CONTRACTOR’s warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. The CONTRCTOR shall be responsible for obtaining equipment warranties in accordance with this section from each of the respective suppliers’ or manufacturers’ equipment specified under Divisions 10 through 16.

D. In the event that the Manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one-year warranty commencing at the

time of OWNER acceptance, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the Manufacturer a two-year warranty starting at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. This two-year warranty shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the one-year warranty starting at the time of OWNER acceptance of the equipment.

1.05 WARRANTY REQUIREMENT

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the OWNER has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. OWNER's Recourse: Written warranties made to the OWNER are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law, nor shall warranty periods be interpreted as limitations on time in which the OWNER can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

E. Rejection of Warranties: The OWNER reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the contract Documents.

F. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the CONTRACTOR.

1.06 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard Product Warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the Manufacturer to the OWNER.

B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater rights for the OWNER.


END OF SECTION


SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for demolition, removal and disposal work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Included, but not limited to, are demolition and removals of existing materials, equipment, or

work necessary to install the new work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Demolition includes concrete pads, structural steel, metals, attachments, appurtenances, piping, electrical and mechanical equipment, paving, curbs, walks, fencing and other existing facilities as shown on the Drawings.

C. Demolitions and removals which may be specified under other Sections shall conform to the

requirements of this Section.

D. Where applicable, these specifications call attention to certain activities necessary to maintain and facilitate continuous operation of existing facilities during and immediately following construction and do not necessarily cover all of the required activities. The CONTRACTOR shall exercise due concern for existing facilities operation and shall direct all his/her activities toward maintaining continuous operation and minimization of operation inconvenience.

E. The use of explosives for demolition work is expressly prohibited on this project.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Construction sequence is included in Division 1.

B. Special provisions are included in Division 1. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to the ENGINEER for acceptance, six copies of proposed schedule of intended operations for demolition of any existing facilities prior to the start of work. Include in the schedule the coordination of shutoff, capping and continuation of utility services as required.

B. Provide a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure the uninterrupted

operation of the OWNER's facilities.

C. Before the start of demolition work, all modifications necessary to bypass the affected structures will be completed. Actual work shall not begin until the ENGINEER has inspected, reviewed and authorized the start of the demolition work, in writing.

D. The above procedure must be followed for each individual plant site of operation.

1.04 CONDITION OF STRUCTURES


A. The OWNER and the ENGINEER assume no responsibility for the actual condition of any structures to be demolished or modified.

B. By submitting a bid, the CONTRACTOR affirms that he has carefully examined the site and all

conditions affecting work. No claim for additional costs will be allowed because of lack of full knowledge of existing conditions.

C. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the

OWNER insofar as practicable. However, variations within a structure may occur prior to the start of demolition work.

1.05 PRE-DEMOLITION MEETING

A. A meeting shall be held with the OWNER or his representative at the jobsite to describe intended demolition and cleaning procedures and schedules. This shall include identifying access routes for bringing necessary equipment in, removing debris from site, and designation of any trees, drives or other items to remain.

1.06 RULES AND REGULATIONS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall determine the applicability and file notifications to the appropriate agencies with regard to demolition work that requires clearances, if required.

B. No structure, or any part thereof, shall be demolished until an application has been filed by the

CONTRACTOR with the appropriate building department and a permit issued. Fees for this permit shall be waived by the department.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain surveys, file permits, and pay fees as appropriate with FDEP,

Broward County, Broward Public Health Unit, and any other state and local agency having jurisdiction over the project scope and location. All such costs shall be included in the bid.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for adherence to all applicable codes of all regulatory

agencies having jurisdiction upon the works. E. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all shop drawing and permit submissions, including

any engineering calculations required for same through use of a license professional engineer.

1.07 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL

A. Salvageable equipment shall be considered the property of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall dismantle all such salvageable items to a size that can be readily handled, cleaned and stored on the site in a protected place specified by the ENGINEER or loaded onto trucks provided by the OWNER.

B. All other material and items of equipment shall become the CONTRACTOR's property and must

be removed from the site. Removal of demolished material shall be undertaken concurrent with the demolition project and within five calendar days.

C. Concrete, concrete block and excess bricks shall be disposed of as specified below in Part 3.


D. The storage or sale of removed items will not be allowed on the site. 1.08 TRAFFIC AND ACCESS

A. Conduct demolition and the removal of equipment and debris to ensure minimum interference with occupied or used facilities. Protect designated trees and plants from damage.

B. Special attention is directed towards maintaining safe and convenient access to any existing

facilities by personnel and vehicles. Erect barriers, fences, guard rails, enclosures, and shoring to protect personnel, structures and utilities to remain intact.

C. Do not close or obstruct accesses to used facilities without permission from the ENGINEER.

Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed access ways. 1.09 PROTECTION

A. Conduct operations to minimize damage by falling debris or other causes to adjacent facilities. Provide exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent the movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.

B. Exercise precautions for fire prevention. Acceptable fire extinguishing apparatus shall be

available at all times in areas where demolition work is being performed using burning torches. Burning of demolition debris shall not be permitted on or near the site.

C. Erect barriers, fences, guardrails, enclosures, and shoring to protect personnel, structures, and

utilities.

D. Cease operations and notify OWNER immediately if safety of adjacent structures appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structures. Do not resume operations until safety is restored.

E. Prevent movement, settlement, damage, or collapse of adjacent services, sidewalks, driveways

and trees. Assume liability for such movement, settlement, or collapse.

F. Ensure safe passage of persons around areas of demolition. 1.10 DAMAGE

A. Promptly repair damage caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operations as directed by the ENGINEER and at no cost to the OWNER. Repairs shall be made to a condition equal or better than that which existed prior to construction.

1.11 UTILITIES

A. Maintain existing utilities in service and protect against damage during demolition operations.

B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized by the ENGINEER. Provide temporary services acceptable to the ENGINEER during interruptions to existing utilities.


C. The CONTRACTOR shall assist the OWNER in shutting off utilities required for the performance of demolition operations.

D The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for making all necessary arrangements and for

performing any necessary work involved in connection with the discontinuance or interruption of all utilities or services under the jurisdiction of the public and private utility companies.

E. All utilities being abandoned shall be disconnected and terminated at the service mains in

conformance with the requirements of the utility companies or the municipality owning or controlling them.

1.12 DUST AND NOISE CONTROL

A. The CONTRACTOR shall take all measures necessary to minimize the amount of dust and noise resulting from demolition activity so as to protect existing plant equipment and meet state and local ordinances..


A. All materials or items of equipment required for the performance of the work of this Section shall be suitable for the intended purpose and shall be equal, where applicable, to similar items and materials specified in other Sections of Divisions 2 through 16.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SEQUENCE OF WORK

A. The sequence of demolition and, where applicable, modifications to existing facilities shall be in accordance with Division 1 and the schedule submitted in accordance with Paragraph 1.03 above.

3.02 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND APPURTENANCES

A. Subject to the constraints of maintaining the existing facilities in operation and prior to demolition, existing process equipment, non-buried valving, piping and appurtenances not necessary for the operation of the new facilities shall be removed.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER fourteen (14) days prior to beginning work on any

existing process units which are in operation.

C. Drainage or disposal of process unit contents into another unit on site may be allowed if approved by the OWNER and only under the OWNER’s directions.

D. All equipment, piping and appurtenances shall be cleaned, flushed and drained. Equipment to be

retained by the OWNER, as previously specified, shall be dismantled sufficiently and thoroughly cleaned and drained. All valves shall be left open. All discontinued piping shall be capped and sleeves and openings remaining after removal of the existing equipment, piping and appurtenances shall be plugged and sealed as shown on the Drawings and as directed by the ENGINEER.


3.03 PREPARATION

A. Arrange for, and verify termination of utility services to include removing meters and capping lines.

B. Notification:

1. Notify the OWNER at least three full working days prior to commencing the work of this Section.

3.04 DEMOLITION

A. Demolition shall be performed where shown on the Drawings as described in this Specification. The demolition limits are shown on the Drawings or, if no limits are shown or specified, to a depth at least 3-ft below existing and proposed final grades, or 3-ft below any new foundation or pipe. Unless otherwise noted, remove existing pavement and structures, including below ground foundations, equipment, piping, and electrical wiring and conduits in their entirety within the areas shown on the Drawings as to be removed or demolished. Additionally, remove all existing foundations, pavement, equipment, piping, and electrical wiring and conduit in their entirety to a depth of at least three (3) feet below any new structure, foundation or pipe to be installed under this project, or that interferes with landscaping, irrigation, or finished grades.

B. Wet down work during demolition operations to prevent dust from arising. Provide protection

from inclement weather for materials, equipment and personnel located in partially dismantled structures.

C. Remove all existing work as indicated on the Drawings or as required and prepare adjoining areas

for installation of the proposed work or for blocking up and filling in of existing openings. D. All demolition debris shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be removed

from the site and disposed off the site in conformance with all applicable laws and regulations. Demolition debris shall not be used for fill or backfill.

E. Blasting or the use of explosives shall not be allowed for demolition work. On-site burning will

not be permitted.

F. Remove from the site all debris resulting from the demolition operations as it accumulates. Upon completion of the work, all materials, equipment, waste and debris of every sort shall be removed and the premises shall be left clean, neat and orderly.

3.05 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE SLABS AND SIDEWALKS

A. Remove miscellaneous concrete slabs and sidewalks where shown on the Drawings or where necessary for the construction of new structures or modifications of existing structures. All concrete sidewalks and curbing not required after the new work is constructed shall be removed and disposed of as specified hereinbefore.

3.06 FINAL GRADE

A. Grade the final site after demolition to match surrounding grade or as shown on the Drawings.


END OF SECTION


SECTION 03301 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all concrete work complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data for:

1. Placing drawings and bar bending details in conformity with the recommendations of ACI

315.

2. Technical data on all materials and components.

3. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete admixtures and curing agents.

B. Test Reports

1. Sieve analysis, mechanical properties and deleterious substance content for fine and coarse aggregates.

2. Concrete mixes: For each formulation of concrete proposed for use, submit constituent

quantities per cubic yard, water cementitious ratio, concrete slump type and manufacturer of cement. Provide either a. or b., below, for each mix proposed.

a. Standard deviation data for concrete mixes based on statistical records.

b. Water cementitious ratio curve for concrete mixes based on laboratory tests. Provide

average cylinder strength test results at 7 and 28 days for laboratory concrete mix designs. Provide results of 14 day tests if available.

C. Certifications

1. Certify that admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with each other and

the aggregates. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A82 - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.


2. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.

3. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

4. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the

Field.

5. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

6. ASTM C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.

7. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.

8. ASTM C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete

9. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement

10. ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the

Volumetric Method.

11. ASTM C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.

12. ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.

13. ASTM C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI).

1. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and

Mass Concrete. 2. ACI 232.2R - Use of Fly Ash in Concrete

3. ACI 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete. 4. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 5. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.

6. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.

7. ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

8. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete.

9. ACI 350 - Code Requirement for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures


C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI)

1. MSP - Manual of Standard Practice

D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with ACI 318 and other stated specifications, codes and standards. Apply the most stringent requirements of stated specifications, codes, standards, and this Section when conflicts exist.

B. If, during the progress of the work, it is impossible to secure concrete of the specified

workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the Engineer may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be necessary to secure the specified properties. Make all changes so ordered at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. All field testing and inspection services and related laboratory tests required will be provided by

the Contractor. The cost of such work will be paid for by the Contractor. Methods of testing will comply with the latest applicable ASTM methods.

D. Develop concrete mixes and their testing by an independent testing laboratory engaged by and at

the expense of the Contractor. Methods of testing shall comply with the latest applicable ASTM methods.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Ship and store reinforcing steel with bars of the same size and shape fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with waterproof markings showing the same designations as those shown on the submitted placement drawings. Provide reinforcing steel free from mill scale, loose rust, mud, dirt, grease, oil, ice or other foreign matter. Store off the ground, protect from moisture and keep free from rust, mud, dirt, grease, oil, ice or other injurious contaminants.

B. Store products in conformity with the manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Store or stockpile sand, aggregates, cement in conformity with ACI 301.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.

B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide

standardization for appearance, maintenance and manufacturer's service.


C. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cement: Domestic Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150. Do not use air entraining cements. The allowable types of cement for each class of concrete are shown in Table 1.

B. Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to ASTM C33.

C. Coarse Aggregate: Well-graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to ASTM C33, size

57. Limits of deleterious substances and physical property requirements as listed in ASTM C33, Table 3 for severe weathering regions.

D. Water: Potable water free of oil, acid, alkali, salts, chlorides, (except those attributable to

drinking water) organic matter, or other deleterious substances.

E. Admixtures: Use admixtures free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those attributable to drinking water). The admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer when it is required to use more than one admixture in the same concrete mix. Use admixtures compatible with the concrete mix including other admixtures [and made for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing].

1. Air Entraining Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C260. Proportion and mix in accordance

with manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Water Reducing Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C494, Type A. Proportion and mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Do not use admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete without written

approval from the Engineer. Use retarding or accelerating water reducing admixtures when so approved.

G. Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars.

H. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Conforming to ASTM A185.

I. Reinforcing Steel Accessories

1. Plastic Protected Wire Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Supports, Class 1 - Maximum Protection.

2. Stainless Steel Protected Wire Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Supports, Class 2 - Moderate Protection with legs made wholly from stainless steel wire.

3. Precast Concrete Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Supports, Precast Concrete Bar Supports.

Precast concrete blocks that have equal or greater strength than the surrounding concrete.

J. Tie Wires for reinforcement: 16 gauge or heavier black annealed wire. 2.03 MIXES


A. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials limits specified in Table 1 and to produce placeable, durable concrete conforming to these Specifications. Proportion ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture which will readily work into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or allowing free water to collect on the surface.

B. Base concrete mixes on standard deviation data of prior mixes with essentially the same

proportions of the same constituents or, if not available, develop concrete mixes by laboratory tests using the materials proposed for the work.

C. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mix or mixes to demonstrate

compliance with the compression strength requirements in conformity with the provisions of ACI 318.

D. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table 1.

E. Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143, shall be as shown in Table 1.

F. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two or more

admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on the properties of the other admixture(s).

TABLE 1

Design Cement Cementitious W/C WR Slump Class Strength ASTM Content Range

(1) C150 (2) (3) (4) Inches _________________________________________________________________________________

A 2500 Type II 440 0.62 max. Yes 1-4

B 3000 Type II 480 0.54 max. Yes 1-4

C 3500 Type II 540 0.45 max. Yes 3-5

D 4000 Type II 560 0.44 max. Yes 3-5

All concrete classes shall have 3.5 to 5 percent air entrainment.

NOTES:

(1) Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days (2) Minimum cementitious content in lbs per cubic yard [(where fly ash is used, cementitious

content is defined as cement content plus fly ash content)] (3) W/C is Maximum Water Cementitious ratio by weight (4) WR is water reducing admixture [(5) Fly ash content in the range of 20-25 percent of the total cement content plus fly ash content, by

weight]


2.04 MEASURING, BATCHING, MIXING AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE

A. Measure, batch, mix and transport concrete in conformance with ASTM C94 and the requirements herein or as otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer.

B. Ready-mixed concrete, whether produced by a concrete supplier or the Contractor shall conform

to the requirements above. Do not hand mix concrete.

C. Dispense admixtures into the batch in conformity with the recommendations of the admixture manufacturer.

D. Mix concrete until there is uniform distribution of the materials and discharge completely before

the mixer is recharged. The mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the mixer manufacturer and mixing shall be continued for at least 1-1/2 minutes after all the materials are in the mixer. Place concrete within 1-1/2 hours of the time at which water was first added, otherwise it will be rejected. Concrete which has been remixed or retempered, or to which an excess amount of water has been added, will also be rejected.

2.05 FORMS

A. Provide forms free from roughness and imperfections, watertight and braced and tied to prevent motion when concrete is placed. Wooden spreaders will not be allowed in the concrete.

B. Wire ties will not be allowed. Metal ties or anchorages which are necessary within the forms

shall be so constructed that the metal work can be removed for a depth of at least 1-1/2-in from the concrete surface without damage by spalling. Clean forms before using and treat with form release agent, or other approved material.

C. All exposed edges of the finished concrete shall be chamfered 3/4-in.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Locate construction joints where indicated or where approved by the Engineer. B. Continue all reinforcing steel through the joint. C. At construction joints and at concrete joints indicated to be "roughened", uniformly roughen the

surface of the concrete to a full amplitude (distance between high and low points and side to side) of 1/4-in with chipping tools to expose a fresh face. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces of loose or weakened materials by waterblasting or sandblasting and prepare for bonding. At least two hours before and again shortly before the new concrete is deposited, saturate the joints with water. After glistening water disappears, coat joints with neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of very heavy paste. The surfaces shall receive a coating at least 1/8-in thick, scrubbed-in by means of stiff bristle brushes. Deposit new concrete before the neat cement dries.

3.02 REINFORCING STEEL


A. Fabricate reinforcing steel accurately to the dimensions shown. Bend bars around a revolving collar having a diameter of not less than that recommended in ACI 318. All bars shall be bent cold.

B. Provide tension lap splices in compliance with ACI 318. Stagger splices in adjacent bars where

possible. Provide Class B tension lap splices at all locations unless otherwise indicated.

C. Lap splices in welded wire fabric in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 but not less than 12-in. Tie the spliced fabrics together with wire ties spaced not more than 24-in on center and lace with wire of the same diameter as the welded wire fabric. Offset splices in adjacent widths to prevent continuous splices.

D. Use precast concrete blocks where the reinforcing steel is to be supported over soil. Use plastic

protected bar supports or steel supports with plastic tips where the reinforcing steel is to be supported on forms for a concrete surface that will be exposed to weather, high humidity, or liquid. Use stainless steel supports or plastic tipped metal supports in all other locations unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified herein.

E. Before placing in position, clean reinforcement of loose mill scale and rust, mud, dirt, grease, oil

and other coatings, including ice that reduce or destroy bond. When there is a delay in depositing concrete after the reinforcement is in place, bars shall be reinspected and cleaned again when necessary.

F. Coat reinforcement which is to be exposed for a considerable length of time after being placed

with a heavy coat of cement grout.

G. Do not cover any reinforcing steel with concrete until the amount and position of the reinforcement has been checked and the Engineer has given permission given to proceed.

3.03 INSPECTION AND COORDINATION

A. Batching, mixing, transporting, placing and curing of concrete shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer at all times. Advise the Engineer of readiness to proceed at least six working hours prior to each concrete placement. The Engineer will inspect the preparations for concreting including the preparation of previously placed concrete, the reinforcing and the alignment, cleanliness and tightness of formwork. Do not place concrete without the inspection and acceptance of the Engineer.

3.04 CONCRETE APPEARANCE

A. Remix concrete showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with paste. If this does not correct the condition, the concrete shall be rejected.

B. Provide concrete having a homogeneous structure which, when hardened, will have the

specified strength, durability and appearance. Provide mixtures and workmanship such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will require no finishing except as specified herein.

3.05 PLACING AND COMPACTING

A. Do not place concrete until forms, condition of subgrade and method of placement have been approved by the Engineer. Remove all debris, foreign matter, dirt, ice and standing water from


the forms before depositing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade, snow or ice. The contact surface between concrete previously placed and new concrete shall be cleaned and brushed with cement paste. Concrete, except as indicated on the Drawings, shall not be placed in water or submerged within 24 hours after placing, nor shall running water be permitted to flow over the surface of fresh concrete within 4 days after its placing.

B. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to prevent segregation due to rehandling or

flowing. Pumping of concrete will be permitted when an approved design mix and aggregate sizes suitable for pumping are used. Do not deposit concrete which has partially hardened or which has been contaminated by foreign materials. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place construction joints as specified or as approved. Place concrete for walls using tremie tubes in 12-in to 24-in lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. Do not drop concrete more than 4-ft.

C. Use high frequency mechanical vibrators to obtain proper consolidation of the concrete. Do not

use vibrators to move or transport concrete in the forms. Do not over-vibrate so as to segregate. Continue vibration until the frequency returns to normal, trapped air ceases to rise and the surface appears liquefied, flattened and glistening. Use spades, rods or forks so that concrete is completely worked around reinforcement, embedded items, pipe stubs, and openings and into corners of forms.

3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of any nature during construction operations.

B. Cure all concrete in conformance with ACI 301. Concrete that is to be used for the containment

of water shall be water cured. Water curing shall be by ponding, by continuous sprinkling or by covering with continuously saturated burlap. Other concrete shall be cured by either water curing, sheet material curing or liquid membrane curing compound except that liquid membrane curing compound shall not be used on any concrete surface where additional concrete is to be placed or where the concrete surface is to be coated or painted.

C. Protect finished surfaces and slabs from the direct rays of the sun to prevent checking and

crazing.

D. During cold weather concrete shall be batched, delivered, placed, cured and protected in compliance with the recommendations of ACI 306R. Do not use salt, manure or other chemicals for cold weather protection.

E. During hot weather concrete shall be batched, delivered, placed, cured and protected in

compliance with the recommendations of ACI 305R. The temperature of the concrete shall be such that it will cause no difficulties from loss of slump, flash set or cold joints. Immediately cover plastic concrete with sheet curing material during hot weather.

3.07 FIELD TESTS

A. Sets of field control cylinder specimens will be taken by the Engineer during the progress of the work, in compliance with ASTM C31. The number of sets of concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day will not be less than one set per day, nor less than one set for each 150 cu yds of concrete nor less than one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surface area for slabs


or walls. Specimens will be formed in 6-in diameter by 12-in long non-absorbent cylindrical molds.

1. A "set" of test cylinders shall consist of four cylinders: one to be tested at seven days and

two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The fourth may be used for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength after 28 days if 28 day test results are low.

2. When the average 28 day compressive strength of the cylinders in any set falls below the

required compressive strength or below proportional minimum seven-day strengths (where proper relation between seven and 28 day strengths have been established by tests), change proportions, cementitious content, or temperature conditions to achieve the required strengths at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Cooperate in the making of tests by allowing free access to the work for the selection of

samples. Provide an insulated closed curing box for the specimens and protect the specimens against injury or loss through construction operations. Furnish material and labor required for the purpose of taking concrete cylinder samples. All shipping of specimens will be paid for by the Owner.

C. Slump tests will be made in the field by the Engineer in conformity with ASTM C143.

D. Tests for air content will be made in the field by the Engineer in compliance with either the

pressure method (ASTM C231) or by the volumetric method (ASTM C173). 3.08 STRIPPING AND FINISHING CONCRETE

A. Do not remove forms before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30 percent of the specified design strength nor before reaching approximately "100 day-degrees" of moist curing (whichever is the longer). Degree-days are defined as the total number of 24 hour periods multiplied by the weighted average daily air temperature at the surface of the concrete (e.g., 7 days at an average 50 degrees F = 350 degree-days).

B. Exercise care to prevent damaging edges or obliterating the lines of chamfers, rustications or

corners when removing the forms or doing any other work adjacent thereto.

C. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

D. Immediately after removal of forms remove tie cones and metal portions of ties. Fill holes

promptly upon stripping as follows: Moisten the hole water, followed by a 1/16-in brush coat of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole with a 1 to 1.5 mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to the touch (just short of “balling”). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense, and an excess of paste appears on the surface in the form of a spider web. Trowel smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing.

E. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas: Chip down square and at least 1-in deep to sound

concrete with hand chisels or pneumatic chipping hammers. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded in the parent concrete. If honeycomb exists around reinforcement, chip to provide a clear space at least 3/8-in wide all around the steel. For areas less than 1-1/2-in deep, the patch may be made in the same manner as described above for filling form tie holes, care being exercised to use adequately dry


(non-trowelable) mixtures and to avoid sagging. Thicker repairs will require build-up in successive 1-1/2-in layers on successive days, each layer being applied (with slurry, etc.) as described above.

F. Concrete to receive dampproofing and concrete not exposed in the finished work shall have off-

form finish with fins and other projections removed and tie cones and defects filled as specified above.

G. Screed top surface of slabs to the established grades and to a true plane with a tolerance of 1/8-

in when checked with a 10-ft straightedge. Pitch surface to drain unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. Finish the surface to give a smooth, hard, even surface free from high or low spots or other defects. Concrete subject to pedestrian traffic shall be given a broom finish. Failure to meet these conditions shall be cause for removal, grinding, or other correction as directed by the Engineer.

3.09 SCHEDULE

A. The following (Table 2) are the general applications for the various concrete design strengths to be used:

TABLE 2 Design Strength

Class (psi) Description

A 2,500 Concrete fill and electrical raceway encasement B 3,000 Concrete overlay slabs and pavements

C 3,500 Walls, slabs on grade, grade beams and all other structural concrete

D 4,000 Walls, slabs on grade, grade beams and all other structural concrete

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05120

STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install structural steel including trusses, bearing and base plates, columns, beams, crane rails, and miscellaneous shapes and plates as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Provide galvanized structural steel including bearing and base plates, columns, beams and

miscellaneous shapes and plates. Provide galvanized members in other locations which are exposed in whole or in part to the weather, including beams supporting exterior masonry. Provide other galvanized members as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

C. Furnish only anchor bolts with layout templates for installation under Division 3. Furnish and

install nuts and washers for anchor bolts.

D. Install by welding, those portions of masonry wire ties and masonry reinforcing bar dowels to be welded to structural steel as shown on the Drawings.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Miscellaneous metal is included in Section 05500.

B. Field painting is included in Section 09902. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, erection drawings, anchor bolt placement drawings, detailed shop drawings, schedules and data for all structural steel. Approval will be for strength only and will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for proper fit of members or for supplying all material as shown on the Drawings or as specified herein. Mark numbers painted on the shop assembled pieces of steel shall be the same mark numbers used on the detailed shop and erection drawings.

B. Calculations required herein. Submit calculations prior to or at the same time as the shop

drawings.

C. Certified mill test reports for the structural steel and the bolting materials.

D. Welders certification in accordance with AWS D1.1, for the shop and field welding procedures to be used.

E. Provide a structural steel framing system to support the masonry sample wall mockup panel

specified in Section 04200.

F. Description of surface preparation and primer, including product data.


G. Copy of AISC Quality Certification for fabricator.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

1. AISC S302 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges

2. AISC S335 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design

3. AISC M016 - Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel

2. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated,

Welded and Seamless

3. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

4. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware 5. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile

Strength

6. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

7. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

8. ASTM A780 - Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings.

9. ASTM A992 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes

10. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel.

11. ASTM E329 - Standard Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection

Agencies as Used in Construction. 12. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, 36, 55 and 105-ksi Yield Strength

C. American Welding Society (AWS)


1. AWS A5.1 - Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding Electrodes

2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation (RCSCEF)

1. Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts.

E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Structural steel: In accordance with AISC S335 and AISC S302, unless otherwise specified herein.

B. Fabrication: By an AISC Quality Certified Fabricator (Complex Steel Buildings Category).

C. Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.1 unless otherwise specified herein or in the AISC

Specification.

D. Welders Certification: By test within the past 6 months to perform type of work required in conformance with AWS D1.1. Testing to be conducted and witnessed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Contractor.

1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide connections not detailed to support the indicated loads. Calculations for these connections shall be prepared and stamped by a professional structural engineer.

B. Provide bolted framed beam connections as shown in Table II of the AISC Manual of Steel

Construction - Allowable Stress Design, Part 4 unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

C. Provide slip critical connections unless otherwise indicated. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials so as to cause no delay with other parts of the work.

B. Store materials on skids and not on the ground. Pile and block materials so that they will not become bent or otherwise damaged.

C. Handle materials with cranes or derricks. Do not dump steel off cars or trucks nor handle in any

other manner likely to cause damage. 1.08 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS

A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper fitting of all items.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural steel wide flange shapes: ASTM A992.

B. Structural steel shapes, other than wide flange shapes, plates, rods and bars unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or as specified: ASTM A36.

C. Structural tube: ASTM A500, Grade B.

D. Structural pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade B.

E. Welding electrodes: AWS A5.1 E70XX.

F. High strength steel bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, mechanically galvanized to

ASTM B695, Class 50, Type II.

G. Anchor bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36. Provide standard headed bolts with heavy hex nuts and Grade A washers

H. Shop primer: As specified in Section 09901.

I. Galvanizing: Zinc with 0.5 percent (minimum) nickel added. J. Galvanized surface primer: Endupor, zinc-rich coating by Dampney Manufacturing Co.,

Everett, MA; ZiRP, zinc-rich coating by Duncan Galvanizing Corp., Everett, MA; ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound by ZRC Chemical Products Co., Division of Norfolk Corp., Quincy, MA, or equal.

K. Expansion anchors and adhesive anchors: Where indicated for the attachment of structural steel

framing provided under this Section, provide expansion anchors and adhesive anchors as specified in Section 05500.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. Match-mark materials for field assembly. Ream unmatched holes in shop assembly of field connections. Reject and replace with new pieces any piece weakened by reaming to a point where the strength of the joint is impaired at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Welding of parts shall be done only where indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein and

by welders and welding operators certified for the procedures used. 2.03 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS

A. Prepare and shop prime paint non-galvanized members as specified in Section 09901. Do not prime paint faying surfaces of slip critical connections. Omit paint within 3-in of field welds. Do not shop paint steel which will receive fireproofing.

B. Galvanize members as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Galvanize after

fabrication and in accordance with ASTM A123. Galvanize hardware in accordance with


ASTM A153. Clean, pickle, flux and immerse members in bath of molten zinc until their temperature becomes the same as the bath. Provide coating of 2-oz per sq ft.

C. Prepare and shop prime paint galvanized members, specified to be painted in Section 09902, as

specified in Section 09901. Do not prime paint faying surfaces of slip critical connections. Omit paint within 3-in of field welds. Do not shop paint steel which will receive fireproofing.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Furnish and install temporary bracing to provide stability during erection and to prevent distortion or damage to the framing due to wind, seismic, or erection forces. Remove temporary bracing when erection is complete.

B. Use drift pins only to bring members into position and not to enlarge or distort holes.

C. Make all steel to steel connections by high strength bolting except where field welding is

indicated or specified. Provide not less than two 3/4-in bolts per connection and use not less than 1/4-in thick clip angles.

D. Tighten bolted connections to full pretension by turn-of-nut or calibrated wrench tightening. E. Field welding shall be done only where indicated on the Drawings or as specified herein and

only by welders certified for the procedures used. Do not weld when surfaces are wet, exposed to rain or wind, or when welders are exposed to inclement conditions that will hamper good workmanship.

F. Assign an identification mark to each bolting crew and welder. Make this mark at each

completed connection with a paint stick.

G. After erection and field testing, using shop primer, prime paint abrasions, field welds, and unprimed surfaces using shop primer except surfaces designated to be unpainted or surfaces in contact with concrete.

H. After erection and field testing, repair damaged galvanizing and field welds on galvanized

surfaces with galvanized surface primer in accordance with ASTM A780. Provide dry film thickness not less than 6 mils.

I. Crane rails for top-running bridge crane runways shall be straight, parallel and at the same

elevation. The center to center distance and the elevation of the rails shall be as indicated on the Drawings, within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/8-in. Provide tight joint splices in the rails, with joint bars and joint bar bolts at splices. Splices shall be located a minimum of 10-ft and a maximum of 30 feet apart, and shall be staggered on parallel crane runways so they do not occur at the same location at each end of the bridge crane. Provide floating rail clamps and fillers at 24-in on center each side of crane rail, with anchor bolts to anchor rail to crane runway beams.

3.02 FIELD TESTING

A. Allow the Engineer free access to the work. Notify the Engineer in writing four working days in advance of high strength bolting or field welding operations.


B. High strength bolting will be inspected visually. All high strength bolts shall have the turned

portion marked with reference to the steel being connected after the nut has been made snug and prior to final tightening. Retighten rejected bolts or remove and provide new bolts at no additional cost to the Owner. In cases of disputed bolt installations, the bolts in question will be checked using a calibrated wrench certified by an independent testing laboratory meeting the requirements of ASTM E329 and acceptable to the Engineer. The certification shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Field welding will be inspected visually and by non-destructive testing by AWS certified

welding inspectors provided by the Owner. Comply with all requests of inspectors to correct deficiencies at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. The fact that steel work has been accepted at the shop and mill will not prevent its final rejection

at the site, before or after erection, if it is determined that it does not comply with this Section.

E. Remove rejected steel work from the site within ten working days after notification of rejection at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05500

MISCELLANEOUS METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all miscellaneous metal complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Structural steel, steel floor and roof deck and steel supports for plank grating are included in other sections of Division 5.

B. Finish painting is included in Division 9.

C. Pipe hangers and sleeves are included in Division 15.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for miscellaneous metal.

1. Show sizes of members, method of assembly, anchorage, connection to other members and

finishes.

B. Design Data

1. Submit manufacturer's load and deflection tables for grating.

C. Certificates

1. Submit certification that the railing system is in compliance with OSHA requirements and the building code.


A. Aluminum Association (AA)

1. AA M12C22A41

a. M12: Mechanical Finish, Non-Specular

b. C22: Chemical Finish, Medium Matte

c. A41: Clear Anodic Coating, Class I



1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel.

2. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,

Welded and Seamless.

3. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality.

4. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and

Steel Products.

5. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

6. ASTM A240 - Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel

Stainless Plate, Sheet, and Strip Pressure Vessels.

7. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.

8. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile

Strength.

9. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

10. ASTM A366 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial

Quality.

11. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

12. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

Structural Tubing.

13. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

14. ASTM A570 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality.

15. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

16. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,

Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. 17. ASTM B429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and

Tube.

18. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc, Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel.


C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)

1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design

D. American Welding Society (AWS)


2. AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.

3. AWS D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel

4. AWS A5.1 - Specification for Covered Carbon Steel Arc Welding Electrodes.

E. Federal Specifications (FS)

1. FS-FF-B-575C - Bolts, Hexagonal and Square

F. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)

1. Code of Federal Regulations, 29 CFR Part 1910

G. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify, at the site, both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of items herein specified.

B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to be built into the

work of other Sections.

C. All welding shall be performed by qualified welders and shall conform to the applicable AWS Welding Code. Welding of steel shall conform to AWS D1.1; welding of aluminum shall conform to AWS D1.2 and welding of stainless steel shall conform to AWS D1.6.


A. Deliver items to be incorporated into the work of other trades in sufficient time to be checked prior to installation.

B. Repair items which have become damaged or corroded to the satisfaction of the Engineer prior

to incorporating them into the work. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS

A. Field measurements shall be taken at the Site, prior to fabrication of items, to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper fitting of all items.



A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired.

B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide

standardization for appearance, maintenance and manufacturer's service. 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise noted, materials for miscellaneous metals shall conform to the following standards:

1. Structural Steel ASTM A36

2. Structural Steel Tubing ASTM A500, Grade B

3. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A501 or ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade

B Schedule 40. Use standard malleable iron fittings, galvanized for exterior work

4. Steel Sheets ASTM A366

5. Aluminum Extruded Pipe ASTM B429, Alloy 6063-T6 and Alloy 6061-T6

as indicated

6. Aluminum Extruded Shapes ASTM B221, Alloy 6061 T6

7. Aluminum Sheet and Plate ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 T6

8. Stainless Steel Plates and Sheets ASTM A240, Type 316 (Type 316L for welded components)

9. Stainless Steel Shapes, Bolts, Nuts, ASTM A276, Type 316 (Condition B for and Washers fasteners) (Type 316L for welded components)

10. Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs ASTM A307, Grade A (hot dip galvanized nuts

and washers where galvanized bolts are indicated or specified)

11. High Strength Steel Bolts, Nuts and ASTM A325, Type 1 (mechanically Washers galvanized per ASTM B695, Class 50)

a. Elevated Temperature Exposure Type I b. General Application Type I or Type II

12. Galvanizing ASTM A123, Zn w/0.05 percent minimum Ni


13. Galvanizing, hardware ASTM A153, Zn w/0.05 percent minimum Ni

14. Welding electrodes, steel AWS A5.1 E70xx 2.03 ANCHORS, BOLTS AND FASTENING DEVICES

A. Anchor bolt material shall be ASTM A307 unless otherwise noted.

B. Unless otherwise noted, bolts for the connection of carbon steel or iron shall be steel machine bolts; bolts for the connection of galvanized steel or iron shall be galvanized steel or stainless steel machine bolts; and bolts for the connection of aluminum or stainless steel shall be stainless steel machine bolts.

C. Unless otherwise noted, expansion anchors shall be zinc plated carbon steel wedge type anchors

complete with nuts and washers. Type 316 stainless steel wedge type anchors shall be used where they will be submerged or exposed to the weather or where stainless steel wedge type anchors are required. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion cone portion of the bolt at least one inch behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion anchors shall be Hilti, Kwik-Bolt III; Simpson Strong-Tie Wedge-All; Powers Power-Stud or equal.

D. Compound masonry expansion anchors shall be lead expansion sleeve type anchors complete

with nuts and washers. Anchors shall be precision die-cast zinc alloy with a minimum of two lead alloy expansion sleeves. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion sleeve portion of the bolt at least one inch behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion anchors shall be Star Expansion Industries Star Slugin or equal.

E. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be a two-part stud and capsule chemical resin anchoring system.

Capsules shall contain premeasured amounts of polyester or vinyl ester resin, aggregate and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. Stud assemblies shall consist of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be Hilti, HVA Adhesive Anchor; Molly Parabond; Rawl Chem-Stud, or equal.

F. Adhesive anchors, for fastening to hollow concrete block or brick, shall be a three-part stud,

screen tube and chemical dispenser anchoring system. Adhesive cartridges shall contain premeasured amounts of resin and hardener which are mixed and deposited in a screen tube by a dispenser. Stud assemblies shall consist of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Anchors shall be Hilti HIT C-20 System or equal.

G. Machine bolts and nuts shall conform to Federal Specification FF-B-575C. Bolts and nuts shall

be hexagon type. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and related appurtenances shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

2.04 METAL GRATING

A. Bar type grating shall have rectangular 3/16-in thick bearing bars spaced 1-3/16-in on center with cross bars spaced at 4-in on center unless otherwise indicated.

1. Grating shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings and shall not exceed the fabricator's

maximum recommended span for that size.


2. Openings 2-in or greater in diameter/dimension and grating edges shall be banded with a

bar of the same depth and thickness as the bearing bars. Cut bearing bars or cross bars shall be welded to the banding bar.

3. Grating fastening devices, including clamps, clips, nuts, bolts, washers and other fastening

devices for grating and grating supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All grating shall be anchored to the supporting system using grating clamps.

4. Grating material shall be aluminum with a cleaned and degreased mill finish. Cross bars

shall be attached to the bearing bars with interlocked swaged joints. The grating shall be by IKG Borden, Ohio Gratings, Inc., Seidelhuber Metal Products, or equal.

2.05 RAILINGS

A. Handrail and guardrail systems shall comply with the requirements of OSHA and the building code. See additional requirements in Section 05510.

B. Guardrails and handrails shall be an aluminum system. C. Welds shall be circumferential welds ground smooth and even to produce a system that is neat

in appearance and structurally sound. Welding methods shall be in conformity with AWS standards for the materials being joined. All rail to post connections shall be coped and fastened by continuous welds. There shall be no burrs, sharp edges or protrusions on any weld on any part of the handrail system. After fabrication, the welds and surrounding area shall be cleaned and hand buffed to blend with the adjacent finish. Bends shall be as indicated on the Drawings. No distortion of the circular pipe shape will be allowed. Bends and terminal sections shall be made without the use of fittings. Corner bends shall have a 3-in centerline radius

D. Railing shall be assembled in sections as long as practical but shall not be greater than 24-ft in

length. A field splice shall be used when an assembled section is to be attached to another section. Field splices shall be used in all railing panels that cross over structure expansion joints.

1. Field splices shall use internal splice sleeves located within 8-in of guardrail posts. The

sleeve shall be riveted to the rail on the post side only and free to slide in the rail on other side. The field splice shall be detailed to take the differential expansion between the guardrail system and the supporting structure.

2. When the field splice occurs in a guardrail panel crossing a structure expansion joint, the

sleeve shall be riveted to the rail on the post side and be free to slide in the rail on other side. The field splice shall be detailed to take the same movement as the structure expansion joint.

E. The bases or supports for guardrail posts and handrail shall be the types indicated on the

Drawings.

1. Where non-removable guardrail is set in concrete, the posts shall be placed in pipe sleeves and firmly grouted with a cement grout. Collars shall be placed around the post bases and be fastened in place with set screws on the side of the post away from the walkway. Posts


shall be placed with the centerline 4-in from the edge of the concrete except that posts shall be set at the centerline of concrete curbs.

2. Guardrail posts, which may collect condensation, shall have a 3/16-in drain hole drilled

immediately above the concrete encased area, the base flange, or supporting socket on the side away from the walking area. The bottom of the rail post between the drain hole and the bottom of the post shall be filled with an inert material such as a compressed closed cell neoprene rod.

3. Where handrail is to be fastened to walls, the rails shall be provided with wall flanges

fastened to the walls with three 3/8-in stainless steel flat head expansion bolts. The horizontal projection of the handrail support off the wall shall provide 2-1/2-in minimum clearance below the bottom of the handrail.

G. Safety gates, for guardrail openings, shall be fabricated of matching pipe and rail material and

configuration. The gates shall be self-closing gates with approved stop, latch and stainless steel closure spring and hinges.

H. Toeboards shall be provided on all guardrails adjacent to a drop in elevation of 4 ft or more.

Toeboards are not required on the inclined portion of stairway guardrails or where concrete curbs, 4-in or more in height are present. Toeboards shall be 4-in high channels of the same material as the guardrail. The channels shall have a minimum thickness of 1/8-in and have flanges of not less than 3/4-in, nor more than 1-1/2-in in width. Toeboards shall be positioned with a maximum clearance of 1/4-in from the floor and fastened to posts with stainless steel self drilling screws as indicated and with clip angle and 3/8-in stainless steel expansion bolt at walls.

I. All railings shall be properly protected by paper, or by an approved coating or by both against

scratching, splashes or mortar, paint, or other defacements during transportation and erection and until adjacent work by other trades has been completed. After protective materials are removed, the surfaces shall be made clean and free from stains, marks, or defects of any kind.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL

A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified.

B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and

strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades.

C. Miscellaneous steel items shall include: tube frame (lobby vestibule grating), beams, angles;

bent plate and angle lintels (face of horizontal legs shall be coped 3/4-in back from face or faces of wall where lintels enter masonry), service door sill angles with welded straps; freight elevator door frames; support brackets, base plates for other than structural steel or equipment; closure angles; angles, plates, bent plates and fasteners for attachment of masonry to structural frame as


shown on the Drawings; bollards of size and type shown and site filled with 2500 psi concrete, bike posts with flush, welded caps and any other miscellaneous steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified.

D. Steel pipe pieces for sleeves for non-mechanical trade applications, lifting attachments and other

functions shall be Schedule 40 pipe unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Wall and floor sleeves, of steel pipe, shall have welded circumferential steel waterstops at mid-length.

E. Galvanizing shall be by the hot-dip zinc process after fabrication per ASTM standards

referenced. All miscellaneous steel specified above or shown shall be galvanized.

F. Embedded pipe supports shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install all items except those to be embedded in concrete which shall be installed under Division 3. Items to be attached to concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will not be permitted.

B. Abrasions in the shop primer shall be touched up immediately after erection. Areas left

unprimed for welding shall be painted with primer after welding.

C. Zinc coating which has been burned by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged shall be cleaned and repaired after installation. The damaged areas shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing and all traces of welding flux and loose or cracked zinc coating removed prior to repair painting. The cleaned area shall be painted with two coats of approved metallic zinc-dust paint. The paint shall be properly compounded with a suitable vehicle and shall contain 83 percent metallic zinc by weight.

D. Install all items in accordance with approved shop drawings.

E. Expansion anchors shall be checked for tightness a minimum of 24 hours after initial

installation. Retighten loose expansion anchors to the manufacturer’s recommended torque value.

F. Install adhesive capsule anchors using manufacturer's recommended drive units and adapters

and in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

G. All railings and tree guards shall be erected to line and plumb.

H. All steel surfaces that come into contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions prior to installation.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 05510 METAL STAIRS AND RAILING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary and install steel stairs complete with anchors and brackets, including integral handrails and posts when applicable, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Concrete is included in Division 3.

B. Miscellaneous Metal is included in Section 05500.

C. Handrailing is included in Section 05500. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, complete shop drawings. Submittals shall indicate construction details, sizes, of metal sections, thicknesses of metal, profiles, attachments, dimensions and field joints, method of support from structure, work to be built-in or provided by other sections and finishes to conform to the Drawings and this Section. Indicate welded connections, both shop and field, using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. Submittals shall include the following:

1. Two samples, each 8-in square in area, of each type finished material.

2. Manufacturer's certification that materials meet specification requirements.


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

1. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes.

B. American Welding Society (AWS)


C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI A202.1 - Metal Bar Grating Manual for Steel and Aluminum Gratings and Stair

Treads.

D. Building Officials and Code Administrators Congress International, Inc. (BOCA)


E. Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.


A. Steel: ASTM A36.

B. Components

1. Stringers: Steel

2. Headers: Steel

3. Treads: Steel

4. Risers: Steel

5. Platforms: Steel

6. Railings: Steel

7. Handrails: Aluminum 2.02 GENERAL FABRICATION

A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. Detail stair risers, treads and landings to conform to the requirements of OSHA latest edition and BOCA.

B. Fabricate stairs, landings, and component connections to support live loads of minimum 100

lb/sq ft with deflection of stairs and landings not exceeding 1/360 of span. Stairs exceeding height of 10-ft shall have landings.

C. Fabricate railing supports and component connections capable of resisting a lateral force of

minimum 150 lbs at any single point, without permanent set or damage and loads indicated in the BOCA.

D. Shop assemble sections in largest practical sizes, easily handled through building openings.

E. Accurately form and fit components and connections. Grind exposed edges and welds smooth

and flush.

F. Accurately form components required for proper anchorage of stairs and landings to each other and to building structure.


2.03 FABRICATION OF SOLID TREAD AND CLOSED RISER STAIRS AND LANDINGS-

EXTERIOR

A. Fabricate stair with closed risers and closed treads using structural channels, angles, plates and extrusions for stringers, treads and all supports.

B. Treads: Extruded or cast with integral nosing to form a one piece structural unit. Abrasive

areas or serrations on the entire walking surface and open holes for drainage. 11-1/16-in wide tread shall be by Borden Metal Products Co.; Intertec Corp. or equal.

C. Properly secure treads to stringers with 3/8-in stainless steel bolts and washers. All other

fasteners are to also be stainless steel.

D. Landings: Use the same design as treads. Reinforce underside of landings with angle T's. 2.04 FABRICATION OF SOLID TREAD AND CLOSED RISER STAIRS AND LANDINGS-

INTERIOR

A. Fabricate stair with closed risers and closed treads using structural channels, angles, plates and extrusions for stringers, treads and all supports.

B. Treads: Extruded or cast with integral/nosing to form a one piece structural unit. Abrasive areas

or serrations on the entire walking surface. 11-1/16-in tread Style Solid Stair Treads shall be abrasive castings with concealed fastenings. Tread Type 105, by Wooster Products, Inc. or equal.

C. Properly secure treads to stringers with 3/8-in stainless steel bolts and washers. All other

fasteners are to also be stainless steel.

D. Landings: Use the same design as treads. Reinforce underside of landings with angle T's. E. Risers shall be 1/8-in plate that is fastened to the treads to completely close the risers.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION

A. Erect stairs square, level, plumb and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance and performance.

B. Provide necessary anchors, plates, angles, hangers and struts as required for connecting stairs to

the structure.

C. Ensure alignment with adjacent construction. Coordinate with related work to ensure no interruption in installation.

D. Perform necessary cutting and altering for the installation of work of other Sections. Do not

perform any other additional cutting without review of the Engineer.


E. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding. Hide bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not hidden, use flush countersunk fastenings, unless indicated otherwise. Make mechanically fastened joints flush hairline butted. Grind welds smooth and flush.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09900

PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnishing materials, labor, equipment and incidentals required to perform the painting necessary to complete this Contract in its entirety.

B. It is the intent of these Specifications to paint all concrete, exposed miscellaneous metal, pipe,

fittings, valves, floors, equipment, pumps, motors, and all other work required to be painted unless otherwise specified. Minor items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of this Section where they come within the general intent of the specifications as stated herein.

C. The CONTRACTOR is notified that alternating dual/contrasting colors may be requested by the

CITY under various portions of the painting work. The CONTRACTOR may be required to mask portions of the work, etc. and perform other work as may be required to paint additional colors. All cost associated with the painting of alternating colors shall be incorporated in the CONTRACTOR's price for painting and shall not be considered an extra to the contract.

D. The following surfaces or items are "NOT" required to be painted and must be protected during all

painting operations. 1. Portions of metal embedded in concrete. This does not apply to the back face of items mounted

to concrete or masonry surfaces which shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to be embedded in or in contact with concrete shall be coated to prevent electrolysis, except area of interface between concrete and the atmosphere.

2. Aluminum: gratings, checkered plates, hatches, handrails, toeboards, stairways and walkways. 3. Stainless steel, brass, bronze, and aluminum other than exposed tubing. 4. Fencing. 5. Piping buried in the ground or embedded in concrete; except area of interface between concrete

and the atmosphere. 6. Ducts, pipes and other miscellaneous items covered with insulation or plastic coated. 7. Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces. 8. Acoustical tile ceilings. 9. Tile. 10. Seamless flooring and floors of concrete tanks, and concrete walkways, unless indicated

otherwise in the specification. 11. Pre-finished plywood and paneling. 12. Furring. 12. Concrete 13. Finish hardware. 14. Nonferrous architectural metals, unless specifically noted otherwise. 15. Exposed aggregate. 16. Copper sheet metal work. 17. Factory finished chemical feed equipment. 18. Diesel engines. 19. Electrical switchgear and motor control centers.


20. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of mechanical equipment.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surface preparation, application procedures and dry film thickness.

B. All coating systems in contact with potable water shall be within NSF guidelines and its ingredients

acceptable to the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for contact with food and potable water. The coating system shall also conform to AWWA D102-78 Inside Paint System No. 1, Paint 3. CONTRACTOR shall furnish proof coating system meets these requirements.

C. Schedule of Painting Operations: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a complete

Schedule of Painting Operations within 30 days after the Notice to Proceed. This Schedule is imperative so that the various fabricators may be notified of the proper shop prime coat to apply. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to properly notify and coordinate the fabricators surface preparation and painting operations with these Specifications. The Schedule shall include each surface to be painted, the brand name, the volume solids, the coverage and the number of coats the CONTRACTOR proposes to use in order to achieve the specified dry film thickness, and color charts. When the Schedule has been approved, the CONTRACTOR shall apply all material in strict accordance with the approved Schedule and the manufacturer's instructions. Wet and dry paint film gages may be utilized by the ENGINEER to verify the proper application while work is in progress.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. All painting materials shall be those manufactured by the Tnemec Company, Inc. or an approved equal. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of products recommended for application indicated. No brand other than Tnemec will be considered for approval unless the brand and type of paint proposed for each item in the following schedule together with sufficient data substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the CITY, to demonstrate its equality to the paint(s) names is submitted in writing to the ENGINEER for approval within 10 days after the Notice to Proceed. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the ENGINEER's approval.

B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the job site in unbroken containers, bearing the

manufacturer's brand and name. They shall be mixed, thinned, and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the applicable materials and surface and with the ENGINEER’s approval before using.

C. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the manufacturer to be compatible

with the finish paints to be used. D. No paint containing lead pigments will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. E. Work areas will be designated by the ENGINEER for storage and mixing of all painting materials.

Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing fixture shall be used for this purpose.


F. All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regards to the health and safety of workmen shall be followed.

2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS

A. All colors will be selected by the CITY from approved color charts submitted by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Surfaces shall have the types of paint as scheduled and applied at the dry film thickness (DFT) in

mils per coat noted. C. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically excepted, including existing

surfaces disturbed by construction, shall be prepared, primed and painted in the manner and with materials consistent with these Specifications. The ENGINEER shall select which of the manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or not, shall be used for such unnamed surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as specified herein, and shall be dry and clean before painting.

B. All metal welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth in accordance with the

manufacturer’s requirements or in, difficult and otherwise inaccessible areas by hand cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP-2. All pits and dents shall be filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, grease and dirt shall be removed by use of approved solvents, wire brushing or sandblasting.

C. Shop-Finished Surfaces: All shop-coated surfaces shall be protected from damage and corrosion

before and after installation by treating damaged areas immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop-coated surfaces shall be "Hand Cleaned" and then touched up with the same materials as the shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded, discolored, or which require more than minor touch-up in the opinion of the ENGINEER shall be repainted. Cut edges of galvanized sheets and exposed threads and cut ends of galvanized piping, electrical conduit, and metal pipe sleeves, not to be finished painted, shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and primed with universal primer.

D. Galvanized and Zinc-Copper Alloy Surfaces: Surfaces to be painted shall be solvent cleaned, i.e.,

degreased and then prepared in accordance with the Painting Schedule. Galvanized gravel and drip pipe shall be left in a natural state. Scratch galvanized coatings shall be rejected. Such surfaces not to be painted shall be cleaned.

E. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment and other metals which are shop

primed before delivery at the site will not require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the surface preparation and painting schedule

3.02 SCHEDULE OF COLORS


A. All colors to be painted shall conform to the following System Color Coding Schedule (Table 09900-1). The CONTRACTOR shall submit color samples to the CITY. The CONTRACTOR shall submit suitable samples of all colors and finishes for the surfaces to be painted, or on portable surfaces. The CITY shall decide upon the choice of colors and other finishes when alternates exist. No variation shall be made in colors without the CITY’s approval. Color names and/or numbers shall be identified according to the appropriate color chart issued by the manufacturer of the particular product in question.

3.03 COLOR CODING AND LETTERING OF PIPING

A. General:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall paint all piping, valves, equipment, exposed conduits and all appurtenances which are integral to a complete functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit system, in accordance with the Color Coding Schedule to be provided by the CITY during shop drawing review. Colors will be selected from the paint manufacturer's standard color charts.

2. In general, the pumps and equipment shall be painted the same color as the piping system to which it is connected unless otherwise directed by the CITY.

B. Banding:

1. Where bands are indicated in the Color Coding Schedule, the pipe is to be painted for its full circumference with a band of the color indicated. The bands shall be six inches wide, neatly made by masking, and spaced eight feet apart. Where banded pipes are running concurrently in a space, bands shall be located so that on adjacently located pipes, bands will be grouped beside each other

C. Lettering of Piping:

1. The CONTRACTOR shall apply identification titles and arrows indicating the direction of flow of liquids to all types and sections of piping.

2. Titles shall be as described in the pipe schedule. Identification titles shall be located midway between color coding bands where possible.

3. Identification lettering and arrows shall be placed generally located every ten feet and shall be properly inclined to the pipe axis to facilitate easy reading. Titles shall also appear directly adjacent to each side of any wall or slab the pipeline passes through, with a minimum of two titles on each pipe in one structure.

4. The titles shall identify the contents by complete name at least once in each area through which it passes and thereafter be abbreviated.

5. The numbers and letters shall be die-cut from pressure sensitive minimum 3.5 mil vinyl film pre-space on carrier tape. Adhesive and finish surface shall be protected with one piece removable lines. Color shall be black on white as directed and shall have an overall height in inches in accordance with Table 09900-2.


6. Letter type shall be Helvetica Medium upper case. The manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed in respect to storage, surface preparation and application.

7. For piping less than ¾ inch diameter, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and attach corrosion resistant color tags with the required lettering.

TABLE 09900-1 PIPING SYSTEM COLOR CODING Type of System Substance in Pipe

Color Piping Band Labeling

Chemical Pipelines

Alum or Primary Coagulant Orange -- Black Ammonia White -- Black Carbon Slurry Black -- White Caustic Yellow Green Black Chlorine (Gas and Solution) Yellow -- Black Fluoride Light Blue Red Black Lime Slurry Light Green -- Black Ozone Yellow Orange Black Phosphate Compounds Light Green Red Black Polymers or Coagulant Acids Orange Green Black Potassium Permanganate Violet -- White Soda Ash Light Green Orange Black Sulfuric Acid Yellow Red Black Sulfur Dioxide Light Green Yellow Black

Water Pipeline

Raw Olive Green -- White Settled or Clarified Aqua -- Black Finished or Potable Dark Blue -- White

Waste Pipelines

Backwash Waste Light Brown -- Black Sludge Dark Brown -- White Sewer (Sanitary or Other) Dark Gray -- White

Other Pipelines

Compressed Air Dark Green -- White Gasoline Red -- White Other Lines Light Gray -- Black

TABLE 09900-2 HEIGHT OF PIPING LETTERING

Diameter of Pipe or Pipe Covering Height of Lettering

3/4 to 1 ¼ inches 1/2 inch 1 1/2 to 2 inches 3/4 inches 2 1/2 to 6 inches 1 1/4 inches 8 to 10 inches 2 1/2 inches Over 10 inches 3 1/2 inches

3.04 ANSI AND OSHA SAFETY COLORS

A. Items specified in the following subsections shall be safety color coated as specified. ANSI colors shall conform with (OSHA) ANSI Z53.1 and latest revisions. Materials shall be


compatible with the system specified for the equipment, concrete, etc. Where a coating system is not specified and safety colors are required, the items shall be coated with a primer and two coats Glid-Guard Alkyd Industrial Enamel, or equal.

B. Red: Items listed in ANSI Z53.1, Section 2.1 shall be painted ANSI Red. In general, these items shall include fire protection equipment and apparatus; wall mounted breathing apparatus, danger signs and locations; and stop bars, buttons or switches.

In addition, all hose valves and riser pipes, fire protection piping and sprinkler systems, and electrical stop switches shall be painted ANSI Red.

C. Orange: Items listed in ANSI Z53.1, Section 2.2 shall be painted ANSI Orange. ANSI Orange shall be used as a basic color for designating dangerous parts of machines or energized equipment which may cut, crush, shock, or otherwise injure and to emphasize such hazards when enclosure doors are open or when gear belt or other guards around moving equipment are open or removed, exposing unguarded hazards. In addition, moving machinery having a linear or peripheral speed in excess of 10 feet per minute, which is either inadequately guarded due to physical problems or may be operated with the guard removed, rims or sprockets, gears, pulleys, etc.; crossheads of large engines and compressors; and flywheels shall be coated ANSI Orange.

D. Yellow: Items listed in ANSI Z53.1, Section 2.3 shall be painted ANSI Yellow. Yellow shall be the basic color for designating caution and for marking physical hazards such as striking against, stumbling, falling, tripping, and "caught in between". In addition, an 8-inch wide strip on the top and bottom tread of stairways shall be coated.

E. Green: Items listed in ANSI Z53.1, Section 2.4 shall be painted ANSI Green. Green shall be the basic color for designating safety and the location of first-aid equipment. In general, gas masks, first-aid kits, eye wash facilities, and safety deluge showers shall be coated with ANSI Green.

F. Blue: Blue shall be used for designating caution, limited to warning against the starting, the use of, or the movement of equipment under repair or being worked upon.

G. Purple: Items listed in ANSI Z53.1, Section 2.5 shall be painted ANSI Purple. In general, atomic sludge density meters shall be coated ANSI Purple.

3.05 CLEANUP

A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the painting remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from and about the buildings and leave work "broom clean" unless more exactly specified.

B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed, or splattered on all surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc., leaving the work ready for inspection.

3/06 EXTRA PAINT

A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used.


SECTION 09900 PAINT SCHEDULE

Category Surface Surface Preparation Coating System No. of Coats & DFT

Ferrous Metals Exterior non-submerged SSPC-SP6 73-1 one 3-4 (Shop) one 2-3(Interim) one 2-3(Top)

Submerged or Subject to Splash (potable)

SSPC-SP10 20-1 one 3-5 (Shop) one 4-6 (Interim) one 4-6 (Top)

Mill-Coated Steel Pipe Exterior or Interior non-submerged

Shop 66-3 one 3-5 (Shop) one 4-6 (Interim) one 4-6 (Top)

Galvanized Steel Exterior non-submerged SSPC-SP1 73-1 one 2-4 (Primer) one 2-4 (Top)

Concrete Exterior above-grade None 6-1 one 2-3 (Primer) one 2-3 (Top)

Exterior below-grade or Contact with Aluminum

None 46-31 one 14-20 (Primer)

Exterior non-submerged Chemical Exposure

SSPC-SP7 66-4 one 3-5 (Primer) one 4-6 (Top)

Submerged or Subject to Splash (potable)

SSPC-SP10 20-2 one 4-6 (Primer) one 4-6 (Top)

PVC Pipe Interior/Exterior None 66-23 one 4-6 (Primer) one 4-6 (Top)

Prestressed Concrete Tank Exterior None 156-1 one 4-6 (Primer) one 4-6 (Top)

Copper, Bronze, Aluminum, etc. (non-ferrous)

As required SSPC-SP1 32 Series one 3-5 as applicable

Colors: Provide selected colors from approved color chart. CONTRACTOR may be required to match paint on existing facilities.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09901

SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the surface preparation and application of shop primers on ferrous metals, excluding stainless steels, as specified herein.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Finish painting is included in Section 09902. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings, manufacturer's specifications and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface preparation, application procedures and dry mil thicknesses. Submittals shall include:

1. Representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by the Engineer.


A. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

1. SSPC-SP-6 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 2. SSPC-SP-10 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 10 Near White Blast Cleaning.

B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Blasting

1. Blasting is defined as a method of preparing the surface of steel with the use of abrasives propelled through nozzles or centrifugal wheels.

2. Blast cleaning is broken down into the following categories:

Definitions: White Metal Blast - SSPC-SP-5 Near White Metal Blast - SSPC-SP-10 Commercial Blast - SSPC-SP-6 Brush Off Blast - SSPC-SP-7


3. White Metal Blast requires removing all mill scale, rust, rust scale, paint or foreign matter. The

surface shall have a gray-white uniform color, slightly roughened to form an anchor pattern as specified for each coating.

4. Near White Metal Blast is described as a surface with very light shadows or streaks caused by

rust stain and mill scale oxides. 95% of each square inch must be free of all visible residues with the remaining 5% limited to the shadows or streaks mentioned above.

5. Commercial Blast is described as a surface with slight shadows, streaks, or discolorations caused

by rust stain, mill scale or slight, tight residues of rust or old paint on the bottoms of the pits. Two-thirds of each square inch shall be free of all contaminants with the remaining one-third limited to discoloration and residues mentioned above.

6. Brush-Off Blast is described as a surface cleaned of all contaminants except tight mill scale or

tightly adhering rust and old paints or coatings which are permitted providing the mill scale and rust have been blasted sufficiently to expose numerous uniformly distributed areas of underlying metal.

7. Dry blasted surfaces must be freed of loose sand, dust and dirt by blowing clean with

compressed air. Wet blasted areas must be rinsed with clean water to which a corrosion inhibitor has been added. The surface then must be dried before coating or priming. Nozzles, hoses, compressor and transformer must be free from oil or water.

8. The blast cleaned surface must be primed or coated before any rusting occurs, otherwise the

benefit of the cleaning will be lost. Application of the primer or the finished coating system should be made immediately after cleaning. Do not permit blast cleaned metal to weather outside overnight.

9. Visual standards - SSPC-VIS-1 (Swedish SIS OS 5900), "Pictorial Surface Preparation

Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces," and the National Association of Corrosion ENGINEERs, "Blasting Cleaning Visual Standards" TM-01-70 and TM-01-75 shall be considered as standards for proper surface preparation.

B. Submerged Surfaces - Shop primer for ferrous metals which will be submerged or which are

subject to splash action or which are specified to be considered submerged service shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec 20-1211 Potapox Primer, dry film thickness 3.5 to 4.5 mils by Tnemec Co., equal NSF Standard 61 certified coating by Ameron (VyGuard), DuPont or equal.

C. Non-Submerged Surfaces - Spray apply one coat of Tnemec 90-91 H 20 Hydro-Zinc 2000 (NSF

Standard 61 certified), dry film thickness 2.5 to 3.5 mils by Tnemec Co. or equal NSF certified coating. Coating shall be Class B, Slip Critical certified for steel construction. Use for structural steel, steel joists and miscellaneous carbon steel items. For pipe and associated items and not over open tanks, spray apply one coat Tnemec 66-1211 Epoxoline Primer dry film thickness 3.0 to 4.0 mils by Tnemec Co., equal by Ameron (VyGuard), DuPont or equal.

D. Non-Primed Surfaces - Gears, bearings surfaces and other similar surfaces obviously not to be

painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test.


E. Compatibility of Coating Systems - Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding primers and finish coats specified in Section 09902 for use in the field and which are recommended for use together.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION

A. Surface Preparation and Priming

1. Non-submerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP-6, immediately prior to priming. Submerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be blast cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP-10, immediately prior to priming.

2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease and other foreign material before priming. 3. Shop prime in accordance with approved manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Non-Primed Surfaces

1. Apply approved coating per manufacturer's recommendations.

3.02 FABRICATED ITEMS

A. All items to be shop primed shall be blast cleaned as specified for applicable service prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating that has been improperly applied or if material contrary to this Section has been used, that coating shall be removed by abrasive blasting to white metal and reprimed in accordance with this Section.

B. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in accordance with this Section.

Remove any prime coats not in accordance with this Section by blast cleaning and apply the specified prime coat at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots prepared as

approved and retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint coats in the field.

D. Shop finish coats, if proposed and allowed, shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to

a field applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat system does not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar nature, prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint as directed by the Engineer to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. Submit to the Engineer substantial evidence that the standard finish is compatible with the specified finish coat.

E. Properly protect the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other cause. F. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be blast cleaned, protect all motors, drives,

bearings, gears, etc, from the entry of grit. Any equipment found to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned.


G. Other Surfaces

1. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment and other metals which are shop primed before delivery at the site will not require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the surface preparation and painting schedule.

2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with a baked-on enamel finish or with a standard factory finish shall not be field painted unless the finish has been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces that have been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the shop coats or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly cleaned and retouched before any successive painting is done on them in the field. All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the original finish.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP

A. General

1. Primer and paint used for a particular surface shall be as scheduled for that type of new surface.

2. At the request of the ENGINEER, samples of the finished work prepared in strict accordance with these Specifications shall be furnished and all painting shall be equal in quality to the approved samples. Any areas not meeting the quality set by the approved sample must be repaired by the CONTRACTOR at no cost to the CITY.

3. Protection of furniture and other moveable objects, equipment, fittings and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations. Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from contact with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates and all machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or spattered paint shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage during the operation and until the finished job is accepted.

4. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with undiluted material. One gallon of paint or originally furnished by the manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s) at no additional cost to the CITY. On masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture, however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. In all cases, maximum film thickness shall not exceed 125% of the mil thickness specified for each coat.

5. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred while using. Only those thinners or other materials specified shall be added to any paint.


6. Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be employed where required.

7. Any defective paint shall be sandblasted and repainted in accordance with the ENGINEER's directions.

8. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall be cleaned and repainted as directed by the ENGINEER.

9. The aluminum work noted on the Drawings or in the Painting Schedule except all structural walkways, supports, railing, toeboards, grating and checkered plate shall be field painted.

10. Any pipe schedule to be painted and having received a coating of a tar or asphalt-compound shall be painted with two coats or equal before successive coats are applied per the schedule.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 09902

FINISHED PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all materials, labor, equipment and incidentals required and perform all the painting necessary to complete this Contract in its entirety as specified herein.

B. It is the intent of this Section to paint all exposed structural and miscellaneous steel; mechanical

and electrical equipment; site lighting poles; site fire alarm and call boxes and sign posts; sluice gates, operators and posts; conveying systems, pipe, fittings and valves; electrical conduit and appurtenances; all as specified in the attached painting schedules and all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. Minor items not mentioned in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of this Section where they come within the general intent of this Section as stated herein.

C. Provide vinyl film letters and numbers for markings as specified. Items noted in Paint Color

Schedule as having factory finish and other factory finished items obviously are not field painted. The Contractor is responsible for having damaged factory finish painted items repaired or, if so ordered, for replacing items. The various Sections are responsible, as stated in each, for preparation and field touch-up of abrasions, welds and damaged primed areas of primed or galvanized components after erection. Polibrid Coatings as distributed by Carboline have a system comparable to that specified for the tank coating system.

D. The following items will not be painted:

1. Concrete (unless otherwise specified in the painting schedules). 2. Finish hardware unless specifically noted otherwise. 3. Non-ferrous metals and stainless steels, unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of mechanical equipment. 5. Maintenance equipment 6. Mechanical and electrical equipment which has been finished painted in the factory as

specified in Divisions 11, 13, 15 and 16. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Shop priming and surface preparation of equipment and piping (except copper piping) are specified in Section 09901 and included in the respective Section with the item to be primed.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, the following:


1. Color cards for initial color selections 2. Three sets of 8-in by 8-in samples, on 1/4-in hardboard, of all colors required for all types of

paint. Include special colors as required. Resubmit until approved. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)

1. SSPC SP-1 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 1 Solvent Cleaning. 2. SSPC SP-2 - Surface Preparation Specification No. 2 Hand Tool Cleaning.


opening shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. All painting materials shall be by the Tnemec Company, Inc.; equals by and, where scheduled, NSF Standard 61 certified equals by Sherwin Williams; Ameron (VyGuard) or equal. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of Tnemec products (unless otherwise noted) and Tnemec recommendations for application. No brand other than those named will be considered for approval unless the brand and type of paint proposed for each item in the following schedule together with sufficient data substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to demonstrate its equality to the paint(s) named is submitted to the Engineer in writing for approval within 30 days after the Effective Date of the General Contract. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken packages, bearing the

manufacturer's brand and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, thinned and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the applicable materials and surface and with the Engineer's approval before using.

C. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the manufacturer to be

compatible with the finish paints to be used. Refer to Section 09901 for special primers. D. No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. E. Work areas will be designated by the Engineer for storage and mixing of all painting materials.

Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes and no plumbing fixture shall be used for this purpose.

2.02 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT

A. The color code establishes, defines and assigns a definite color for each process system. All elements which are an integral part of the system, that is originating from the equipment and/or supplying the equipment, shall be painted between and up to but not including the fixed flanges


nor the flexible conduit connections on the equipment. Valves and fittings shall be painted in the color of the main body of the pipe.

B. Elements will be assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral part of the

Contract. C. All hanger saddles and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and with the

same paint as the pipe it supports. Hanger rods and hanger rod connections to building structure shall be painted to match the color of the wall or ceiling to which it is attached.

2.05 EXTRA PAINT

A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used. 2.06 TESTING EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish to the Engineer for use on the Project for paint inspection, wet and dry film thickness gauges and all other equipment required by the Engineer for inspection.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared as specified herein and shall be dry and clean before painting.

B. All metal welds, blisters, etc, shall be ground and sanded smooth. All pits and dents shall be

filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth surface for painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, tar and asphalt bearing coatings, grease and dirt shall be removed by use of approved solvents, wire brushing, grinding or sanding.

3.02 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. All colors will be selected by the Engineer. B. The following types of paints by Tnemec Co. have been used as a basis for the paint schedule:

1. Hi-build Epoxoline (Series 66) - polyamide cured epoxy 2. Potapox (Series 20) (FC - fast cure where scheduled) - polyamide cured epoxy (NSF

Standard 61 certified for contact with water being treated and elsewhere as scheduled). 3. Envirofil (No. 130-6601 olive color) - waterborne cementitious acrylic 4. Endura-Shield III - semi-gloss (Series 73) - high-build acrylic polyurethane enamel. 5. Silicone Aluminum (No. 39-661) - high heat silicone aluminum (to 600 degrees F). 6. Elasto-Shield (Series 264 and trowel grade, Series 265TG) - modified polyurethane (NSF

Standard 61 certified).


7. Hydro-Zinc (Series 90 - 91H2O 2000) - organic vehicle zinc-rich (NSF Standard 61 certified). 8. Vinester (Series 120) - vinyl ester. 9. Tneme-Cryl (Series 6) - acrylic latex emulsion, eggshell finish. 10. PPG Industries Rez Polyurethane Satin Clear Plastic Interior Varnish 77-89 - Urethane -

alkyd, clear, satin sheen with approved Rez alkyd-oil stain under.

C. The following surfaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied at the dry film thickness (DFT) in mils per coat noted:

1. Exterior non submerged ferrous metals.

1 coat Series 90-91H2O 2000 on properly prepared unprimed metal or for touch-up (2.0-3.0

DFT)

1 coat Series 66 (4.0 DFT), 1 coat Series 73 (3.0 DFT) 3.03 WORKMANSHIP

A. General

1. At the request of the Engineer, sample areas of the finished work prepared in strict accordance with this Section shall be furnished and all painting shall be equal in quality to the approved sample areas. Finished areas shall be adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of workmanship. Experimentation with factory or paint manufacturer's warehouse mixed colors shall be furnished to the satisfaction of the Engineer where standard chart colors are not satisfactory.

2. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings and accessories shall

be provided throughout the painting operation. Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from contact with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc, before painting, protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery nameplates and all machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or spattered paint shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other work from all damage during the operation and until the finished job is accepted.

3. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the manufacturer to

achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture; however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint.

B. Field Priming


1. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment and other metals

which are shop primed before delivery at the site will not require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the painting schedule. Surface preparation of bare metal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Equipment which is specified to receive a baked-on enamel finish or other factory finish

shall not be field painted unless the finish has been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces that have been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the shop coat or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly cleaned and retouched before any successive painting is done on them in the field. All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the original finish. Preparation and painting shall be provided by the Contractor.

3. Equipment shipped with a protective shop painting coat or coats shall be touched up to the

satisfaction of the Engineer with primers as recommended by the manufacturer of the finish paint. Preparation and painting shall be provided by the Contractor.

C. Field Painting

1. All painting at the site shall be under the strict inspection of the Engineer. Only skilled

painters and, where dictated by special conditions or systems and so ordered, specialist painters shall be used on the work.

2. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting shall be done when

the temperature is below 60 degrees F, in dust-laden air, when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have completely disappeared from the surface to be painted. No coatings shall be applied unless surface temperature is a minimum of 5 above dew point; temperature must be maintained during curing.

3. Successive coats of paint shall be different shades (from paint manufacturer's stock or shop

mixed paint) of the required colors so as to make each coat easily distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat the approximate shade of the finished coat to ensure no show-through as approved.

4. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. Undercoats shall be

thoroughly and uniformly sanded with the type paper appropriate for the undercoats to remove defects and provide a smooth even surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted.

5. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly manner so as to

facilitate inspection. Materials subject to weather shall be primed coated as quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection.

6. All painting shall be performed by approved methods with number of coats modified as

required to obtain the total dry film thickness specified. Spray painting shall be performed specifically by methods submitted and as approved by the Engineer.


7. All surfaces to be painted as well as the atmosphere in which painting is to be done shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's directions.

8. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall be cleaned and

repainted as directed by the Engineer.

9. Only the aluminum work noted on the Drawings or in the Painting Schedule shall be field painted.

3.04 CLEANUP

A. At all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the painting, remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials and all rubbish from and about the buildings and leave the work "broom clean" unless more exactly specified.

B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed, or spattered on all

surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc, leaving the work ready for inspection.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 11240 LIME FEED SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install and test complete, ready for operation the lime feed system components as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. It is the intent of this Section that a single supplier furnish and be responsible for the lime feed

system the Lime Slurry Pumps and tank. The lime feed system supplier shall be responsible for furnishing all the parts including valves, piping, wiring, controls, etc and components required for a complete and operable system.

C. All power and control wiring required for a complete operating system, including power and

control wiring from each system control panel to the various items of equipment furnished under this Section, shall be furnished and installed under this Section. All electric materials and installation shall conform to all applicable Sections of Division 16 and all other authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Field Painting is included in Section 09902.

B. Instrumentation and control work, except as specified herein, is included in Division 13. Instrumentation and controls provided in this section shall adhere to Instrumentation and Control Specification Sections in Division 13.

C. Piping, valves and appurtenances are included in Division 15.

D. Electrical work, except as specified herein is included in Division 16.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for:

1. Certified shop and erection Drawings showing all important details of construction,

dimensions and anchor bolt locations. Shop Drawings shall also show complete information regarding location, size, type and length of all welds in accordance with AWS A2.0. Special conditions shall be fully explained by notes or details.

2. Descriptive literature, bulletins and/or catalogs of each item of equipment.

3. The empty weight and the maximum operating weight of each major item of equipment.

4. A complete total bill of materials for all equipment.


5. A list of the manufacturers' recommended spare parts. Include gaskets, packing, etc, on the

list.

6. The recommended summer and winter grades of lubricants along with alternative references to equal products of other manufacturers.

7. Complete motor data.

8. Complete wiring diagrams and schematics of each control panel, controllers, control

device, etc, furnished under this Section.

9. Complete wiring diagrams and schematics of all power and control systems showing wiring requirements between all system components, motors, sensors, control panels, etc, including connections to work of other Sections.

B. Warrantees

1. Provide equipment warranty per Section 01740.


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specifications for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings.

3. ASTM A570 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA)

1. AWWA B202 - Quicklime and Hydrated Lime

C. American Welding Society, Inc. (AWS)

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI Z55.1 - Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment

F. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

H. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) I. Hydraulic Institute (HI), Current Edition.


J. National Electrical Code (NEC)

K. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The equipment shall be the product of manufacturers who are fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The system components shall be designed, constructed, delivered and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods. The system shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown on the Drawings.

B. The required components shall be furnished by a single supplier who shall be responsible for the

coordination of the system design and who shall assume complete responsibility for the proper operation of each system.


A. Lime will be diluted to about 10 percent concentration in a replacement mixing tank from which the lime slurry pumps will take suction. The lime slurry pumps will be paced manually.

B. The lime slurry pump(s) described herein and on the drawings shall be manually controlled.

The lime slurry pump(s) shall be fed from a mixing tank. The existing mixer can be reused. However, it cannot be supported by the new tank. An independent support structure should be provided.


A. This Section is intended to give a general description of what is required, but does not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as offered. It is, however, intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation and field testing of all materials, equipment and apparatus as required. Any additional auxiliary equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not mentioned in this Section, or shown on the Drawings, shall be furnished and installed.

B. All equipment shall be designed and proportioned to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness

and to be especially adapted for the intended service.

C. All equipment and piping shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position and all necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and equipment aligned and locked in place. All bolts, nuts and washers shall be of stainless steel.

D. Brass (16 gauge) or stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, model

number, serial number, rated capacity, speed and any other pertinent data shall be properly and rigidly attached to each item of equipment.


E. Brass (16 gauge) or stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, serial number, model number, horsepower, speed, voltage, amperes and other pertinent data shall be attached to each motor.

F. Engraved laminated nameplates giving the name and function of all selected switches,

pushbuttons, alarm lights and control devices shall be securely attached to each panel.

G. All electrical materials and equipment shall be UL listed and shall otherwise by equal to that specified under Division 16. Control panels shall be factory wired and mounted as far as is practicable.

H. All motors included under this Section shall be designed for severe, heavy duty service and of

the totally enclosed, non-ventilated type conforming to NEMA Standards. Motor horsepower and speed shall be as determined by the system supplier and approved by the Engineer. Motors shall be designed in accordance with and for operation on a power supply as specified under Division 16.

I. Removable, all-metal guards in complete conformance with OSHA Standards shall be provided

for all motor couplings, V-belt drives and similar exposed rotating elements.

J. All bolts, nuts, washers, clamps, etc, wetted or subject to splashing, used to interconnect system components shall be of Type 316 stainless steel.

K. Electrical connections to each item of equipment subject to vibration shall be made with flexible

liquid tight metal conduit. 2.02 LIME SLURRY TANK

A. The lime slurry tank shall be fabricated from HDPE. The tank shall have a hinged access cover. All necessary connections for piping, level probes and mixer mounting shall be provided. Provide all necessary inlets, outlet, overflow and other connections. Contractor to verify tank size in the field.

2.03 LIME SLURRY FEED PUMPS A. General 1. Pumping assembly, including pump and driver, to operate within vibration and bearing

temperature limits specified over the full operable range of the pump assembly. 2. Pump driven as indicated. 3. Design and proportion all parts of pump for the service specified. 4. Provide room and facilities for inspection, repair and adjustment. 5. Equip pumping unit with all specified and necessary accessories, including lifting

attachments, pressure sensor, gauges and switches, variable speed drive, discharge dampener and leak detection system.


B. Conditions of Operation are shown on the drawings C. Pump- Horizontal centrifugal pumps to match existing. See Figures for information on existing pumps

D. Pump Drive System

1. Motor a. Provide squirrel cage induction motor with NEMA C face. b. Provide sufficient HP to operate the pump at maximum required speed without

exceeding the nameplate ratings for current and power. c. Service Factor: 1.15 d. Insulation: Class F E. Baseplate 1. Bolt pump and drive to a common baseplate and frame. 2. Make baseplate of ASTM A36 fabricated structural steel. 3. Provide provisions for anchor bolts. 4. Design baseplate with adequate strength to support pump and driver. 5. Provide planed surfaces for bearing pads for pumps and drives. 6. Install pumping units and baseplates in kind. 2.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING

A. All surfaces shall be prepared and shop primed and finish painted as part of the work under this Section. Surface preparation and shop priming shall be as specified in Section 09901.

2.05 SHOP TESTING

A. The Engineer shall have the right to inspect materials or equipment to be furnished under this Section prior to their shipment to the job site.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Remove all packing and protective elements that may interfere with the future operation of the equipment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the location shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required lubricants for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Locate equipment specified herein on concrete pads with all electrical, plumbing and vent

connections.

C. Remove equipment and supports from the existing lime feed room as shown on the Drawings to accommodate the equipment specified herein.

3.03 FIELD TESTING

A. Upon completion of installation, in the presence of the Engineer, perform a preliminary test (no lime) over the full range of the system to ensure the functioning of all component parts to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The test shall be over the full range of capacity. All labor, equipment and power shall be supplied by the Contractor. Approval of the preliminary test by the Engineer shall not constitute final acceptance of the equipment furnished.

C. After the plant is in operation, a full operating test shall be performed in the presence of the

Engineer. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required for such tests and correct any deficiencies noted by repairing or replacing the defective component and retesting as required until the equipment meets the requirements specified herein and the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall have 30 days to make the changes necessary to meet the requirements. Equipment that remains unable to meet the operating requirements shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory units at no additional cost to the Owner. Lime for the full operating test will be furnished by the Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13300

PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - GENERAL PROVISIONS (AS APPLICABLE TO INTEGRATION WITH EXISTING


A. A pre-approved Process Control System Integrator (PCSI) shall furnish all services and equipment defined herein and in other specification sections. The scope of work for this project is as shown on the Drawings and other sections.

B. All materials, equipment, labor, and services required to achieve a fully configured, integrated

and operational process control system shall be provided. The PCSI shall design and coordinate the process control system for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these specifications and with related existing equipment.

C. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or performance to interface

with existing equipment or equipment provided by other suppliers under other sections of these specifications, shall be included whether or not they are shown on the drawings. These devices include, but are not limited to, transducers, current isolators, signal conditioners or interposing relays.

D. Substitution of functions or type of equipment specified shall not be acceptable. In order to

ensure interchange ability of parts, maintain quality, interface between the various subsystems, and establish minimums with regard to ranges and accuracy, strict compliance with the above requirements shall be maintained. System design shall allow removing individual devices from service without disrupting other devices in service.

E. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed, and placed in proper operating condition

in full conformity with detail drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations by the equipment manufacturer as approved by the Engineer.

F. To facilitate the Owner's future operation and maintenance, products shall be by the same

major manufacturer, with panel mounted devices of the same type and model as far as possible.

G. The Owner shall retain salvage rights to all material and equipment removed in the course of

this work. All materials and equipment retained by the Owner shall be delivered to a point designated by the Owner. Any material or equivalent not retained by the Owner shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the PCSI in accordance with applicable regulations and laws.


H. All equipment and installations shall satisfy applicable Federal, State, and local codes.

I. Supplementing this section, the Drawings and the related specification sections provide

additional details showing functional requirements of the system, and interfacing with other equipment.

J. All materials, equipment, labor, and services necessary to achieve the monitoring and control

functions described herein shall be provided in a timely manner so that the monitoring and control functions are available when the equipment is ready to be placed into service.

K. The PCSI shall coordinate and schedule all required testing with the General Contractor,

Owner, and Engineer.

L. The PCSI shall coordinate and schedule all required training with the General Contractor, Owner, and Engineer.

M. The PCSI shall provide a monthly status report and updated project schedule to the General

Contractor to include and update the General Contractor’s overall project schedule. 1.02 RELATED WORK

A. The PCSI shall furnish all materials, labor, and services specified in the following specification sections as required to ensure that a single, coordinated system is supplied:

1. Section 13315 - Process Instrumentation & Controls – Products

2. Section 13325 - Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment

B. Divisions requiring coordination shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Division 1 - General Requirements

2. Division 11 - Equipment

3. Division 13 - Special Construction

4. Division 15 - Mechanical

5. Division 16 - Electrical

C. The PCSI shall coordinate with all equipment suppliers, mechanical subcontractor, electrical

subcontractor, and General Contractor. 1.03 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. The PCSI shall schedule and administer a minimum of three (3) mandatory coordination


meetings. The PCSI shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies to participants at least one (1) week before scheduled meetings.

1. The first coordination meeting shall be held in advance of the first PCSI shop drawing

submittal. The purpose of the first meeting shall be for the PCSI to:

a. Summarize their understanding of the project

b. Discuss any proposed substitutions or alternatives

c. Schedule testing and delivery milestone dates

d. Request any additional information required from the Owner and/or Engineer.

2. The PCSI shall bring a draft version of shop drawings to the meeting to provide the basis for the Owner/Engineer's input into their development.

3. The second coordination meeting shall be held after the Field Instruments, Digital System

Hardware, and Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment shop drawing submittal have been reviewed by the Engineer and returned to the PCSI. The purpose of the second meeting is to:

a. discuss comments made on the submittal package

b. refine scheduled milestone dates

c. coordinate equipment installation activities

4. The last coordination meeting shall be held one month prior to factory acceptance testing.

The purpose of the last coordination meeting is to discuss any remaining coordination requirements.

5. A typical agenda may include, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Review minutes of previous meetings

b. Review of Work progress

c. Field observations, problems, and decisions

d. Identification of problems which impede planned progress

e. Review of submittal schedule and submittal status

f. Review of off-site fabrications and delivery schedules

g. Maintenance of progress schedule


h. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules

i. Planned activities for subsequent work period

j. Coordination of projected progress

k. Maintenance of quality and work standards

l. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination

m. Other business relating to Work 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. These shop drawings shall fully demonstrate that the equipment and services to be furnished comply with the provisions of these specifications and provide a true and complete record of the equipment as manufactured and delivered. Each submittal shall be securely bound with an index and sectional dividers. All submittal drawings shall be legible and reduced to a maximum size of 11-inches x 17-inches.

B. The Engineer shall determine whether a product is an “Approved Equal” based upon the

information listed herein and the manufacturer’s data sheets regarding the models specified. Alternate equipment must meet the criteria listed herein and any additional information in the manufacturer’s data sheets in order to be accepted as an “Approved Equal.” Supplier must furnish five (5) working installation references for any alternate equipment along with owner, contact, and telephone number.

C. The submittals listed below shall be provided as a minimum. Other submittals not listed here

may be required by other specification sections. Each submittal must be complete. No partial submittals shall be accepted.

1. Project Plan

a. The project plan shall be submitted and approved before any additional submittals

shall be accepted.

2. Field Instruments

3. Digital System Hardware

4. Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment

5. Testing

6. Training

7. Loop Diagrams


8. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment

9. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals

D. Submittal Descriptions

1. Project Plan

a. The Project Plan shall provide an overview of the proposed system including system

architecture drawing, approach to work, proposed work schedule indicating milestones and potential meetings, project personnel and organization, general details of factory testing and field testing, and general details of training program. The Project Plan shall also include an acknowledgment of conformance to the specification on a paragraph-by-paragraph basis indicating any proposed deviations. The schedule shall be coordinated with the project execution schedule and illustrate all major project milestones including the following:

1) Schedule for all subsequent project submittals

2) Schedule for all project design review meetings

3) Schedule for manufacture, assembly and staging of all process control system

equipment

4) Schedule for all tests

5) Schedule for shipment of all process control system equipment and peripheral devices

6) Schedule for equipment start-up

7) Schedule for all training


a. This submittal shall provide complete documentation of all field instruments using

ISA-20 format. A complete Bill of Materials (BOM) listing all instrumentation equipment shall be provided.

b. Data Sheets

1) Provide data sheets for each instrument listing model numbers, options, and

ancillary devices that are being provided.

2) The data sheets shall be provided with an index, proper identification, and cross referencing. The data sheets shall include, but not be limited to, the following


information:

(a) Plant Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the Loop Diagrams

(b) Product (item) name used herein and on the Contract Drawings

(c) Manufacturer's complete model number

(d) Location of the device

(e) Input - output characteristics

(f) Range, size, and graduations

(g) Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification and mounting details

(h) Materials of construction of all components

(i) Instrument sizing calculations where applicable

(j) Certified calibration data for all flow metering devices

c. Equipment Specification Sheets

1) Provide equipment specification sheets which shall fully describe the device,

the intended function, how it operates and its physical environmental and performance characteristics. Each data sheet shall have appropriate cross references to loop or equipment identification tags. As a minimum the specification sheets shall include the following:

(a) Dimension, rigid-clearances

(b) Mounting or installation details

(c) Connection

(d) Electrical power or air requirements

(e) Materials of construction

(f) Environmental characteristics

(g) Performance characteristics

(h) Complete information regarding the field instruments as required by ISA-


5.4 standards shall be provided under this contract.

3. Digital System Hardware

a. This submittal shall provide complete documentation of the proposed hardware (PLC’s, RIO’s, communication equipment, cables, peripherals, etc.) A complete Bill of Materials (BOM) listing all digital hardware equipment shall be provided.

b. The submittal shall include the following:

c. System Block Diagram

1) A complete schematic system block diagram(s) showing the interconnections

between major hardware components including, but not limited to:

(a) Panels and RTUs

(b) Power supplies

(c) Computer and peripheral devices (HMIs)

(d) Telemetry equipment and communication equipment

(e) PLCs, RIOs and like equipment

(f) Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS)

2) The block diagram shall reflect the total integration of all digital devices in the system and any human machine interface (HMI) locations. Location of all components shall be clearly identified with appropriate cross references.

3) The diagram shall reference all interconnecting cabling requirements for digital

components of the system including any data communication links.

d. Data Sheets

1) A data sheet for each hardware component listing all model numbers, options, auxiliary and ancillary devices that are being provided.

2) The data sheets shall be provided with an index, proper identification, and cross

referencing. They shall include, but not be limited to, the following information:

(a) Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the Loop Diagrams (as

applicable)





(e) Input/output characteristics (f) Range, size, and graduations

(g) Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification and

mounting details


(i) Power supply device sizing calculations where applicable

e. The Digital System Hardware submittal shall also contain all planning information, site preparation instructions, grounding and bonding procedures, cabling diagrams, plug identifications, safety precautions or guards, and equipment layouts in order to enable the General Contractor to proceed with the detailed site preparation for all equipment.

4. Control Panels and Panel Mounted Equipment

a. This submittal shall provide complete documentation of all panel instruments, control panels, all panel instruments, and other panel instruments and control equipment not specified to be submitted elsewhere. A complete Bill of Materials (BOM) listing all instrumentation and control equipment shall be provided.

b. Data Sheets

1) Provide data sheets for each component listing all model numbers, options, and

ancillary devices that are being provided.

2) The data sheets shall be provided with an index, proper identification, and cross referencing. The data sheets shall include, but not be limited to, the following information:

(a) Plant Equipment Number and ISA tag number per the Loop Diagrams (as

applicable)




(e) Input - output characteristics


(f) Range, size, and graduations

(g) Physical size with dimensions, enclosure NEMA classification and

mounting details


(i) Panel instrument or control device sizing calculations where applicable

c. Equipment Specification Sheets

1) Provide equipment specification sheets which shall fully describe the device, the intended function, how it operates, and its physical environmental and performance characteristics. Each equipment specification sheet shall have appropriate cross references to loop or equipment identification tags with model number and information pertaining to the item highlighted. As a minimum the specification sheets shall include the following:

(a) Dimension, rigid-clearances

(b) Mounting or installation details

(c) Connection

(d) Electrical power or air requirements

(e) Materials of construction

(f) Environmental characteristics

(g) Performance characteristics

d. Detailed Drawings

1) Provide detailed drawings covering control panels, consoles and/or enclosures

which shall include:

(a) Cabinet assembly and layout Drawings to scale. Drawings shall include both front and interior subpanel layouts.

(b) Material, fabrication, and painting specifications

(c) Color selection samples for selection by the Engineer

(d) Panel wiring diagrams showing all power connections to equipment within

and on the panel, combined panel power draw requirements (volts, amps),


breaker sizes, fuse sizes, and grounding. This wiring diagram shall be in ladder logic format and shall reference the appropriate loop drawing for continuations or details where required. Show all wire numbers and terminal block designations.

2) The submittal shall also contain all planning information, site preparation

instructions, grounding and bonding procedures, cabling diagrams, plug identifications, safety precautions or guards, and equipment layouts in order to enable the General Contractor to proceed with the detailed site preparation for all equipment.

3) The submittal shall also include heat dissipation calculations for each

enclosure.

5. Testing

a. Test Plan

1) A test plan shall be submitted after all hardware submittals have been approved by the Owner and/or Engineer. The test plan shall demonstrate that the PCSI has designed and configured a system that meets the design specifications. The test plan shall be submitted prior to the preparation of the detailed test procedures and submit outlines of the specific proposed tests. Submittals shall include examples of the proposed forms and checklists.

2) The system shall be tested using the system architecture drawing and a Bill of

Materials of all hardware indicating manufacturer, model, and serial number. The documents for the test plan shall be structured so that the Engineer understands what the inputs are, what the predicted outputs should be and what the actual outputs are. The test plan shall have a sign-off and date block for the PCSI, General Contractor, Owner, and Engineer.

3) The test plan should include the following as a minimum:

(a) A Bill of Materials (BOM) listing control system components

(b) System hardware summary

(c) A testing schedule describing the specific tasks to be performed and the

time allotted for each task

(d) Communications tests to the various PLCs for discrete and analog I/O data transfer

(e) 100 percent (100%) I/O point test including all spare points based upon the

previously submitted system I/O list

b. Test Procedures


1) The test procedures shall be submitted after the preliminary test procedure

submittals have been reviewed by the Engineer and returned stamped either "approved" or "approved as noted, confirm.” The submittal shall document the proposed procedures to be followed during the test. Procedures shall include test descriptions, forms, and checklists to be used to control and document the required tests. Testing may not be started until all Testing Submittals have been approved.

2) For Test Documentation submit a copy of the signed off test procedures upon

completion of each required test.

6. Training

a. Training Overview

1) Within 90 days of contract award to the General Contractor, submit an overview of the proposed training plan. Each proposed course shall include:

(a) An overview of the training plan explaining why specific courses are

proposed

(b) Course title and objectives

(c) Prerequisite training and experience of attendees

(d) Recommended attendees

(e) Course Content - A topical outline

(f) Course Duration

(g) Course Location - Training center or job-site

(h) Course Format - Lecture, laboratory demonstration, etc.

2) The Engineer shall review the preliminary training plan submittal with the Owner.

7. Training Plan

a. Upon receipt of the Owner's and Engineer's comments on the preliminary training

plan, submit the specific proposed training plan. The training plan shall include:

1) Definition of each course

2) Specific course attendance


3) Schedule of training courses including dates, duration, and location of each

class

4) Resumes of the instructors who will actually conduct the training

8. Loop Diagrams

a. Provide detailed loop diagrams on single 11-inches x 17-inches or 8.5-in x 11-inches sheet for each monitoring or control loop. The loop diagram shall show all components of the loop both analog, digital, and discrete including all relays, switches, dropping resistors, etc. which are being provided for proper operation. Loop numbers used shall correspond to the loop numbers indicated in the contract documents. The format shall be the Instrument Society of America, Standard for Instrument Loop Diagrams, ISA-5.4, and the following requirements:

1) On each diagram present a tabular summary of:

(a) the output capability of the transmitting instrument

(b) the input impedance of each receiving instrument

(c) estimate of the loop wiring impedance based on wire sizes and

approximate length used

(d) the total loop impedance

(e) reserve output capacity

2) Show all interconnecting wiring between equipment, panels, terminal junction boxes and field mounted components. The diagrams shall show all components and panel terminal board identification numbers and all wire numbers. This diagram shall include all intermediate terminations between field elements and panels (e.g., terminal junction boxes). The diagrams shall be coordinated with the electrical contractor and bear mark showing this has been done.

3) Show location of all devices

4) Show instrument description showing type, manufacturer, model number,

range, setpoints, and operation (e.g., fail open, open on energization, normally closed, etc.) as applicable.

5) Show all instrument loop power or instrument air requirements back to

termination on terminal block or bulkhead, fuse blocks (including fuse size), etc., as applicable.

6) Show all grounding points within cabinets and panels and identify the

connection point of individual components.


7) Complete information regarding the field instruments as required by ISA-5.4

standards shall be provided on the loop diagrams under this contract.

9. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment

a. This submittal shall include the following for each Subsystem:

1) A list of, and descriptive literature for, spares, expendables, and test equipment as specified in other instrumentation Sections

2) A separate list of, and descriptive literature for, additional spares, expendables,

and test equipment recommended by the PCSI

3) Unit and total cost for the additional spare items recommended for each subsystem

4) Storage instructions for all spare parts

5) Any specialty software or hardware tools used during configuration of the

project. NOTE: These specialty tools must be turned over to the Owner.

10. Provide O & M Manuals. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1. ASTM A269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.

B. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation (ISA)

1. ISA 5.2 - Binary Logic Diagrams for Process Operations

2. ISA 5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display Instrumentation Logic

and Computer Systems.

3. ISA 5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams

4. ISA 5.5 - Display Instrumentation Logic and Computer Systems

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI X3.5 - Flowchart Symbols and Their Usage in Information Processing


D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid

opening shall apply. 1.06 PCSI QUALIFICATION

A. The PCSI shall perform all work necessary to select, furnish, configure, customize, debug, install, connect, calibrate, and place into operation all hardware and software specified within this Division and other related divisions.


A. The Personal Computer/Programmable Logic Controller-based system shall monitor and control the systems as shown on the P&IDs, Instrumentation loop diagrams, and system architecture drawings.

The control system shall be designed to collect and store operating information, perform process control, monitor and report non-normal operating conditions, equipment failures, perform system process calculations, provide system operating displays and reports. The overall system shall be an intelligent type PLC based control system configured in a hierarchical arrangement connected via telemetry.


A. Provide Delivery, Storage, and Handling requirements per Specification Section 01600 and as specified below:

B. Shipping Precautions

1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test, and approval, all equipment, cabinets,

panels, and consoles shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. The equipment shall then be skid-mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be provided for moving without removing protective covering. Boxed weights shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at jobsite.

2. Special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation required by the

manufacturer for proper protection, shall be securely attached to the packaging for each piece of equipment prior to shipment. The instructions shall be stored in resealable plastic bags or other acceptable means of protection.

3. None of the control equipment shall be shipped to the site until the room(s) is

environmentally suitable.


C. Identification

1. Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, tag number and function in the system. Identification shall be prominently displayed on the outside of the package.

2. Each piece of equipment supplied shall have a permanent stainless steel or other

non-corrosive material tag firmly attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag number, as given in the Drawings.

D. Storage

1. Equipment shall not be stored out-of-doors. Equipment, including in-line equipment,

shall be stored in dry permanent shelters and adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the General Contractor at his own cost and expense. If any equipment has been subject to possible damage by water, it shall be thoroughly dried and put through such tests as directed by the Engineer. Any repair or replacement shall be at the cost and expense of the General Contractor.

1.09 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS

A. Environmental Requirements. Air-conditioned areas require NEMA Type 1A enclosures. Equipment below grade shall be NEMA Type 4X. All other areas require NEMA Type 3R stainless steel enclosures powder coated white unless noted otherwise. Refer to Division 16 for area environmental hazardous classifications. Outdoor areas require sun shields.

B. Temperature. Indoor areas' equipment shall be suitable for 10 to 35 C degrees ambient.

Outdoor areas' equipment shall be suitable for zero to 50 C degrees ambient. Storage temperatures shall range from zero to 50 C degrees ambient. Additional cooling or heating shall be furnished if required by the equipment.

C. Relative Humidity. Air-conditioned area equipment shall be suitable for 20 to 95 percent

relative, non-condensing humidity. All other equipment shall be suitable for 0 to 100 percent relative, condensing humidity.

D. Power Supply. 120 volts AC sources of electric supply shall be unregulated industrial panel

boards. 1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Spare Parts

1. Spare parts shall be as defined in the related specification sections. All spare parts shall be new and unused.

2. All spare parts shall be individually packaged and labeled.

3. Provide one (1) gallon of touch-up paint, in one-quart containers, for each type and color


used for all cabinets, panels, consoles, etc., supplied under the related specification sections.

4. The spares listed above shall be packed in a manner suitable for long-term storage and

shall be adequately protected against corrosion, humidity, and temperature.

B. Specialty Tools

1. Any specialty software or hardware tools used on the project must be turned over to the Owner.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Provide equipment warranties per Section 01740, Warranties and Bonds, and herein. 1.12 O & M MANUALS

A. Prior to final acceptance of the system and owner training, operating and maintenance manuals covering instruction and maintenance on each type of equipment shall be furnished. A preliminary draft copy is to be submitted for review. Upon final approval, the deliverable is five (5) bound copies of the final approved draft.


A. Process Control System:

1. All instrumentation supplied shall be of the manufacturer's latest design and shall

produce or be activated by signals which are established standards for the water and wastewater industries.

2. All electronic instrumentation shall be of the solid-state type and shall utilize linear

transmission signals of 4 to 20 mA DC (milliampere direct current), however, signals between instruments within the same panel or cabinet may be 1-5V DC (volts direct current), or the like.

3. Output of equipment not of the standard signals as outlined, shall have the output

immediately raised and/or converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission. No zero based signals will be allowed.

4. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware, floor stands, wall brackets, or

instrument racks as shown on the Drawings or as required.

5. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet Class, Group, and Division as shown on the Electrical Drawings, to comply with the National Electrical Code.


6. All indicators and recorder readouts shall be linear in process units, unless otherwise noted.

7. All transmitters shall be provided with either integral indicators or conduit mounted

indicators in process units, accurate to two percent (2%).

8. Electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design, utilizing printed circuitry and suitably coated to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. Solid state components shall be conservatively rated for their purpose to assure optimum long term performance and dependability over ambient atmosphere fluctuations and 0 to 95% percent relative humidity. The field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and slightly corrosive service conditions.

9. All equipment, cabinets, and devices furnished hereunder shall be heavy-duty type,

designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as possible, and shall consist of equipment models which are currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion.

10. The field mounted digital system equipment and system components shall be designed

for installation in dusty, humid, and slightly corrosive service conditions.

11. All electronic/digital equipment shall be provided with radio frequency interference protection and shall be FCC approved.

B. Electrical

1. All equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 Hertz alternating current power source

at a nominal 120 volts, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted. All regulators and power supplied required for compliance with the above shall be provided between power supply and interconnected instrument loop. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be supplied.

2. Materials and equipment used shall be UL approved wherever such approved equipment

and materials are available.

3. All equipment shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of a power interruption, the equipment specified hereunder shall resume normal operation without manual resetting when power is restored.

2.02 LIGHTNING/SURGE PROTECTION

A. General - Lightning/Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation system from induced surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level, and be maintenance free and self-restoring. Instruments shall be housed in a suitable metallic case, properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall be connected to a good earth


ground, and where practical, each ground wire run individually and insulated from each other. These protectors shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure or a separate NEMA 4 junction box coupled to the enclosure. All contact points shall be copper with nickel plating. The transient response of units shall be less than 1 nanosecond. The surge protector should meet IEEE C-62-41 Standards. Lightning/surge protectors shall be provided at each instrument in the field.

1. Manufacturer

a. Phoenix Contact

b. Telecommunications Industries Inc.

c. Joslyn

d. Approved equal

B. Power Supply - Protection of all 120 VAC instrument power supply lines shall be provided.

Cabinet(s)/panel(s) and groups of field instruments, regardless of location (indoor or outdoor), shall be protected by isolation transformers and surge suppressors. Individual field instruments shall be protected by individual surge suppressors.

C. Signal Line - All analog signal lines shall be protected through the use of metal oxide varistors

(MOVs), line to line and line to ground inductors, Zener diodes and gas tube arrestors with fuses on a PC board mounted in a snap track and labeled. These shall be provided at both ends of the signal lines and as close to the instruments as possible.

2.03 TUBING AND FITTINGS

A. All instrument air header takeoffs and branch connections less than 2-inches shall be 316 stainless steel.

B. All instrument shut-off valves and associated fittings shall be supplied in accordance with the

piping specifications and all instrument installation details. Fittings shall be Swagelok 316 stainless steel or equal and valves shall be Whitney 316 stainless steel or equal.

C. All instrument tubing shall be fully annealed ASTM A269 Seamless 316 grade free of O.D.

scratches and having the following dimensional characteristics as required to fit the specific installation:

1. 1/4-in to 1/2-in O.D. x 0.035 wall thickness

2. 5/8-in to 1-in O.D. x 0.049 wall thickness

3. 1-in O.D. x 0.065 wall thickness

4. 1-1/4-in O.D. x 0.065 wall thickness


5. 1-1/2-in O.D. x 0.083 wall thickness

6. 2-in O.D. x 0.095 wall thickness

D. All process connections to instruments shall be annealed 1/2-in O.D. stainless steel tubing, Type 316.

E. All tube track shall be supported by stainless steel and installed as per manufacturer's

installation instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. The process control system, instrumentation, and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The locations of equipment, transmitters, alarms, and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be as approved by the Engineer during construction. All information relevant to the placing of process control work shall be obtained in the field. In case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner.

3.02 TESTS (GENERAL)

A. The PCSI shall test all equipment at the factory prior to shipment. Unless otherwise specified in the individual specification sections, all equipment provided by the PCSI shall be tested at the factory as a single fully integrated system.

B. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following:

1. Operational Readiness Tests (ORT)

2. Functional Demonstration Tests (FDT)

3. 30-Day Site Acceptance Tests (SAT)

C. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate

an input (cause) and, upon the system's or subsystem's producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirement shall be satisfied.

D. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with prior Engineer-approved procedures, forms,

and check lists. Each specific test shall be described and followed by a section for sign off by the appropriate party after its satisfactory completion.

E. Copies of these sign off test procedures, forms, and check lists will constitute the required test

documentation.


F. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide suitable means of simulation. Define these simulation techniques in the test procedures.

G. The General Contractor shall require the PCSI to coordinate all testing with the Engineer, all

affected Subcontractors, and the Owner.

H. The Engineer reserves the right to test or retest all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the prior approved Test Procedures.

I. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all

testing.

J. No equipment shall be shipped until the Engineer has received all test results and approved the system is ready for shipment.

K. The PCSI shall furnish the services of servicemen, all special calibration and test equipment

and labor to perform the field tests.

L. Correction of Deficiencies

1. All deficiencies in workmanship and/or items not meeting specified testing requirements shall be corrected to meet specification requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. Testing, as specified herein, shall be repeated after correction of deficiencies is made

until the specified requirements are met. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.03 OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTS (ORT)

A. Prior to startup, the FDT and the SAT, the entire system shall be certified (inspected, tested, and documented) that it is READY for operation.

B. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire system shall be checked for proper

installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop and component-by-component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and these Specifications.

1. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using

Engineer-approved forms and check lists.

a. Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following information and check off items with space for sign off by the PCSI:

1) Project Name

2) Loop Number


3) Tag Number for each component

4) Check offs/sign offs for each component

(a) Tag/identification

(b) Installation

(c) Termination – wiring

(d) Termination – tubing

(e) Calibration/adjustment

5) Check offs/sign offs for the loop

(a) Panel interface terminations

(b) I/O interface terminations

(c) I/O signal operation

(d) Inputs/outputs operational: received/sent, processed, adjusted

(e) Total loop operation

6) Space for comments

b. Each active Analog Subsystem element and each I/O module shall have a

Component Calibration Sheet. These sheets shall have the following information, spaces for data entry, and a space for sign off by the PCSI:

1) Project Name

2) Loop Number

3) Component Tag Number of I/O Module Number

4) Component Code Number Analog System

5) Manufacturer (for Analog system element)

6) Model Number/Serial Number (for Analog system)

7) Summary of Functional Requirements:

(a) Indicators and Recorders: Scale and chart ranges


(b) Transmitters/Converters: Scale and chart ranges

(c) Computing Elements: Function

(d) Controllers: Action (direct/reverse) control Modes (PID)

(e) Switching Elements: Unit range, differential (FIXED/ADJUSTABLE),

Preset (AUTO/MANUAL)

(f) I/O Modules: Input or output

8) Calibrations:

(a) Analog Devices: Required and actual inputs and outputs at 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling

(b) Discrete Devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points

(c) Controllers: Mode settings (PID)

(d) I/O Modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs for 0, 10, 50, and 100

percent of span, rising and falling

9) Space for comments

10) Space for sign off by the PCSI

2. The General Contractor shall require the PCSI to maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the job-site and make them available to the Engineer/Owner at any time.

3. These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer shall

review and initial all Loop Status Sheets and Component Calibration Sheets and spot-check their entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Readiness Test. Any deficiencies found shall be corrected.

3.04 FUNCTIONAL DEMONSTRATION TEST (FDT)

A. Prior to startup and the 30-Day Test, the entire installed instrument and control system shall be certified that it is ready for operation. All preliminary testing, inspection, and calibration shall be complete as defined in the Operational Readiness Tests.

B. Once the facility has been started up and is operating, a witnessed Functional Demonstration

Test shall be performed on the complete system to demonstrate that it is operating and in compliance with these Specifications. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph-by-paragraph, loop-by-loop, and site-by-site basis.

C. Loop-specific and non-loop-specific tests shall be the same as specified under Functional


Demonstration Tests except that the entire installed system shall be tested and all functionality demonstrated.

D. Updated versions of the documentation specified to be provided for during the ORT shall be

made available to the Engineer at the job-site both before and during the tests. In addition, one (1) copy of all O&M Manuals shall be made available to the Engineer at the job-site both before and during testing.

E. The daily schedule specified to be followed during the ORT shall also be followed during the

Functional Demonstration Test.

F. The system shall operate for 100 continuous hours without failure before this test shall be considered successful.

G. Demonstrate communication failure and recovery

H. Demonstrate total power failure and recovery. NOTE: The UPS shall be removed for this test.

I. Demonstrate a catastrophic failure and recovery of a workstation and a PLC.

J. Demonstrate procedure for backing up the computer system (including PC and PLC); reload

using a backup; and completely restore a PC and/or PLC from a backup. 3.05 30-DAY SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT)

A. After completion of the Operational Readiness and Functional Demonstration Tests, the PCSI shall be responsible for operation of the entire system for a period of 30 consecutive days, under conditions of full plant process operation, without a single non-field repairable malfunction.

B. During this test, plant operating and PCSI personnel shall be present as required. For this test,

the PCSI is expected to provide personnel who have an intimate knowledge of the system hardware and software.

C. While this test is proceeding, the Owner shall have full use of the system. Only plant operating

personnel shall be allowed to operate equipment associated with live plant processes.

D. Any malfunction during the tests shall be analyzed and corrected by the PCSI. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test.

E. During this 30 consecutive day test period, any malfunction which cannot be corrected within

24 hours of occurrence by PCSI personnel, or more than two similar failures of any duration, will be considered a non-field-repairable malfunction.

F. Upon completion of repairs by the PCSI, the test shall be repeated as specified herein.

G. In the event of rejection of any part or function, the PCSI shall perform repairs or replacement


within 14 days.

H. The total availability of the system shall be greater than 99.5 percent (99.5%) during this test period. Availability shall be defined as:

I. Availability = (Total Testing Time-Down Time) Total Testing Time

J. Down times due to power outages or other factors outside the normal protection devices or

back-up power supplies provided shall not contribute to the availability test times above.

K. Upon successful completion of the 30-day site acceptance test and subsequent review and approval of complete system final documentation, the system shall be considered substantially complete, and the one year warranty period shall commence.

3.06 TRAINING

A. General

1. The cost of training programs for the Owner’s personnel shall be included in the Contract price. Where practical, the training and instruction shall be directly related to the system being supplied.

2. Training shall be conducted at the manufacturer’s training facility, PCSI’s training

facility, and/or the Owner’s facilities.

3. All Technicians, Operators, Engineers, and Managers of the Facility shall require training on the Process Control System (PCS). The training courses shall address operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the system provided. The courses shall be designed specifically for the type of personnel attending, such as Operators, Engineers, etc.

4. All training schedules shall be coordinated with and at the convenience of the Owner.

Shift training may be required to correspond to the Owner's working schedule.

5. Provide detailed training manuals to supplement the training courses. The manuals shall include specific details of equipment supplied and operations specific to the project.

6. The trainer shall make use of teaching aids, manuals, slide/video presentations, etc. After

the training services, all training materials shall be delivered to Owner.

7. The Owner reserves the right to videotape all training sessions. All training tapes shall become the sole property of the Owner.

B. Factory Training

1. N/A

C. Field Training



a. Provide a minimum of one 8-hour hardware training and instruction on the

maintenance of the field instrumentation for four (4) of the Owners instrumentation technicians. This training shall be conducted before the Functional Demonstration Test, but no more than one (1) month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall take place at the Owners facility. As a minimum the following shall be included:

1) Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided

2) Specific training of the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a

detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and set up for this Contract

3) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures

4) Troubleshooting and diagnosis

5) Periodic maintenance

2. Panel Instruments

a. Provide a minimum of one 8-hour hardware training and instruction in the

maintenance of the panel instrumentation for four (4) of the Owners technicians. Training should be conducted before the Functional Demonstration Test, but not more than one (1) month before and at a time suitable to the Owner. This training shall be provided at the Owners facility and at a minimum the following shall be included:

1) Training in standard hardware maintenance for the instruments provided

2) Specific training of the actual instrumentation configuration to provide a

detailed understanding of how the equipment and components are arranged, connected, and configured for this Contract

3) Test, adjustment, and calibration procedures

4) Troubleshooting and diagnosis

5) Periodic maintenance

3. OIT Functions

a. Provide a minimum of two 2-hour training sessions for four (4) shifts of Owner’s

operations personnel on the detailed operation of the operator interface terminal.

Accelator Bid 148 City of Dania Beach 2/27/2013

3.07 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS AND DETAILS

A. To assist the PCSI in determining the scope of work, a series of loop diagrams and details are provided. Unless specifically stated otherwise, the PCSI shall be responsible for providing all instrumentation, control equipment, and auxiliary devices necessary to perform the functions specified herein and as shown and described on these diagrams. Any auxiliary devices such as lightning/surge protectors, relays, timers, signal isolators, signal boosters, etc. which are necessary for complete operation of the system, or to perform the functions specified, shall be included whether or not they are specifically shown or tabulated on the loop diagrams.

B. The intent of the loop diagrams (as shown in the Drawings) are to describe in as much detail

as possible, the hardware, software and functional requirements of a process measurement and control system. They are not intended to convey requirements for conduit and wiring between panels or system components. This information is included in appropriate electrical specifications and Drawings. Any additional wiring or raceway required for a fully operational system shall be provided at no additional cost to the owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13315

PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS - PRODUCTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section covers the furnishing, installation, and services for the field-mounted instruments and analyzers, major systems, panels, and subassemblies as detailed on the drawings and in the Loop Diagrams.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOW METERING INSTRUMENTS

A. Propeller Flow Meter

1. Propeller Meter

a. Function/Performance:

1) Flow meter shall be designed to operate continuously at any flow rate within the rated range.

2) Meter accuracy shall be +2% of rate at any flow from the minimum rating to

150% of maximum rating.

3) Meter shall be wet flow calibrated against a primary standard accurate to +0.25% or better traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (formerly NBS).

4) Two (2) certified copies of the calibrations taken at or near minimum flow

rating, at mid-range and at the highest flow rate within the range attainable by the test facility shall be furnished to the engineer.

b. Meterhead

1) Meterhead shall be mounted on a flanged connection for ease of removal from

the pipe for inspection or service.

2) Meterhead shall consist of a cast iron or steel cover plate, bronze or cast iron gear box, stainless steel, delrin or hard rubber wetted working parts and polyethylene propeller.

3) Drive mechanism shall consist of stainless steel gears and shafting.


c. Manufacturer(s):

2. Sparling or approved equal 3. Transmitter/Totalizer

4. Type

a. Propeller Meter shall be supplied with a digital indicator/totalizer and a 4-20 mA

output proportional to the flow.

5. Function/Performance

a. The accuracy shall be +2% of actual flow.

b. 4-20 mA output shall be a true two-wire requiring an external power supply of 18 - 30 Vdc with reverse polarity protection of 35 Vdc maximum. The accuracy shall be +0.5% of full scale.

c. Output connection will be pigtail leads through 1/2-inch NPT grommeted or potted

sealed conduit connection.

6. Physical:

a. Enclosure: Painted die cast aluminum, NEMA 3R. Ambient temperature limits +30F (-1C) to +130F (+55C).

7. Manufacturer(s):

a. The unit shall be by the same manufacturer as the propeller meter.

2.02 LEVEL INSTRUMENTS (not used) 2.03 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS (not used) PART 3 EXECUTION- not used

END OF SECTION


SECTION 13325

CONTROL PANELS AND PANEL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT


A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required, to install, complete and ready for operation, the panels depicted on the Drawings and on the Instrumentation Details provided.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be prepared and transmitted to the Engineer for approval in compliance with Section 01300 of these Specifications. In addition, shop drawings shall include the following information:

1. Material for all panels, instrument racks, and enclosures.

2. Drawings shall be to scale and shall show the location of panel mounted devices as well

as doors and subpanels.

3. Drawings shall include a panel legend and a bill of materials. The panel legend shall list and identify front of panel devices by their assigned tag numbers, nameplate inscriptions, service legend, and annunciator inscriptions.

4. The bill of materials shall list devices mounted within the panel that are not listed in the

panel legend, and shall include the tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number for each.

B. Interconnecting Wiring Diagram

1. Provide interconnecting wiring diagrams showing electrical connections between

equipment, consoles, panels, terminal junction boxes, and field mounted components.

2. Diagrams shall show component and panel terminal board identification numbers, and external wire and cable numbers.

3. Circuit names corresponding to the Circuit and Raceway Schedule shall be shown. Note:

This diagram shall include intermediate terminations between field elements and panels (e.g., terminal junction boxes, pull boxes, etc.).

4. This diagram shall be coordinated with the Electrical Subcontractor and shall bear his

mark showing that this has been done. Diagrams, device designations, and symbols shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 1-101.



A. The panels shall be mounted on wood skids four inches high. Adequate crating will be provided for the panel being shipped where a transfer from one truck to another is planned.

B. Instruments shall be blocked and tied to prevent damage during shipment. Front-panel

mounting instruments shall be removed and pre-packed in their original containers for shipment.

C. Accessories, drawings, instruction bulletins, etc., shall be packed and shipped with the panel.

1.04 MAINTENANCE

A. Spare Parts: In addition to the spare parts listed in other instrumentation sections, provide the following:

1. Fuses: 20 percent of each size and type use, but no less than ten of each size and type.

2. Relays: 20 percent of each type used, but no less than five of each type.

3. Corrosion Inhibiting Vapor Capsules: Provide 10 of each type and size used.

B. The spares listed above shall be packed in a manner suitable for long-term storage and shall be

adequately protected against corrosion, humidity and temperature. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL PANEL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Furnish and install the panels per Specifications.

B. The panels shall be the wall mount type, complete with PLC or RIO unit, fiber optic equipment and radio equipment as required, instruments, pushbuttons, indicating lights, nameplates and other related equipment.

C. The construction and wiring shall be in accordance with this Specification and applicable

panel drawings. The panel drawings will specify the arrangement of instruments to be mounted on the front, rear, and sides of the panels.

D. Unless otherwise specified on applicable panel drawings, all panels shall be of the fully

enclosed type designed for use with high-density instrumentation mounting.

E. The instruments designated for rear-of-panel mounting shall be arranged within the panel according to respective panel drawings and in a manner to allow for ease of maintenance and adjustment.

F. Conductors running from the field to the panels shall be continuous without splices, except at

approved junction boxes. The junction boxes shall have terminal blocks with 20 percent spare terminals. Special care shall be exercised to carry grounding lines through such junction boxes with the least possible resistance. Cables entering panels shall be multi-conductor. Conduit and multi-conductor cables entering panels shall be sealed to prevent the intrusion of gas and


moisture.

G. Multi-conductor cable shall be used between junction boxes and the panels.

H. The panels shall be completely fabricated, instruments installed and wired at the PCSI’s facility.

I. All components shall be mounted in a manner that shall permit servicing, adjustment, testing

and removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any other component. Components mounted on the inside of panels shall be mounted on removable plates and not directly to the enclosure. Mounting shall be rigid and stable unless shock mounting is required otherwise by the manufacturer to protect equipment from vibration. Components mounting shall be oriented in accordance with the internal components shall be identified with suitable plastic or metal engraved tags attached with drive pins adjacent to (not on) each component identifying the component in accordance with the drawing, specifications, and PCSI’s data.

J. All exterior panel mounted equipment shall be installed with suitable gaskets, faceplates, etc.

required to maintain the NEMA rating of the panel.

K. All panels shall be supplied with suitable nameplates which identify the panel and individual devices as required.

2.02 PANEL MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Panels shall be constructed of a minimum of 14 gauge Type 304 stainless steel with angle or channel bracing. Panel fronts shall be fabricated from a single piece of sheet steel. Side filler panels, top filler panels, and subpanels shall be 12-gauge steel. Steel shall be selected for levelness and smoothness and shall be free from scale or any blemish which would mar the finish. Panels shall be suitable for installation in NEMA Type 3R environments.

B. Structure and Enclosure

1. Panels shall be of continuous welded-steel construction. Provide steel angle stiffeners as

required on the back of the panel face to prevent panel deflection under instrument loading or operation. Internally the panels shall be supplied with a structural steel framework for instrument support purposes and panel bracing. The internal framework shall permit panel lifting without racking or distortion.

2. Each panel shall be provided with full height, fully gasketed access doors where shown.

Doors shall be provided with a three-point latch and heavy duty locking handle. Rear access doors shall be conveniently arranged and sized such that they extend no further than 24 inches beyond the panel when opened to the 90-degree position. Front and side access doors shall be as shown. Panel access doors shall be provided with full length, continuous, piano type, steel hinges with stainless steel pins.

3. The panels, including component parts, shall be constructed and assembled in a

thoroughly workmanlike manner and shall be free from sharp edges and welding flaws. Wiring shall be free from kinks and sharp bends and shall be routed for easy access to other components for maintenance and inspection purposes.

4. All panels shall be as manufactured by Hoffman, or equal.


C. Finish Requirements

1. All sections shall be descaled, degreased, filled, ground and finished. The enclosure when

fabricated of steel shall be finished with two rust resistant phosphate prime coats and two coats of enamel, polyurethane, or lacquer finish which shall be applied by either the hot air spray or conventional cold spray methods.

2. The panels shall have edges ground smooth and shall be sandblasted and then cleaned

with a solvent. Surface voids shall be filled and ground smooth.

3. Immediately after cleaning, one coat of a rust-inhibiting primer shall be applied inside and outside, followed by an exterior intermediate and top coat of a two-component type epoxy enamel. A final sanding shall be applied to the intermediate exterior coat before top coating.

4. Apply a minimum of two (2) coats of flat white lacquer on the panel interior after

priming.

5. Unless otherwise noted, the finish and exterior color of all panels shall be white powder coated.

2.03 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

A. Should sufficient heat be generated within a panel where dissipation cannot be adequately accomplished with natural convection, an air conditioner shall be provided. The contractor shall provide heat dissipation calculations for each enclosure.

B. The internal temperature of all panels shall be regulated not to exceed 100 degrees Fahrenheit.

Under no circumstances shall the panel cooling equipment compromise the NEMA rating of the panel.

C. All panels shall be provided with sun shields. Sun shields shall be constructed of 304 stainless

steel and white powder coated. 2.04 CORROSION CONTROL

A. Panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules as manufactured by Northern Instruments Model Zerust VC; Hoffman Engineering Model A-HCI; or equal.

2.05 CONTROL PANEL - INTERNAL CONSTRUCTION

A. Internal Electrical Wiring

1. Panel equipment shall be mounted and wired on or within the cabinet. Wiring shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Wiring within the panel shall be grouped together with harnesses or ducts and secured to the structure. Wiring shall be numbered in compliance with the numbering system used on the wiring/connection diagrams. Wiring and connection diagrams shall comply with ISA 5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams and shall be submitted by the manufacturer as part of the Shop Drawings for review by


the Engineer .

2. Power and low voltage DC signal wiring shall be routed in separate wire ways. Crossing of the two system wires shall be at right angles.

3. Power wire shall be 14 AWG Type THWN stranded and shall be insulated for not less

than 600 volts unless specified otherwise. Conductors shall be of tinned copper construction. All interconnecting wiring, except for electronic circuits, shall be rated for not less than 90 C.

4. Control wire may be 16 AWG Type THWN stranded and shall be insulated for not less

than 600 volts unless specified otherwise. Conductors shall be of tinned copper construction. All interconnection wiring, except for electronic circuits, shall be rated for not less than 90 C.

5. Signal wire shall be 1 pair 16 AWG shielded. Conductors shall be of tinned copper

construction.

6. Wire color shall be: Line Power - Black; Neutral or Common - White; AC Control - Red; DC Control - Blue; Equipment or Chassis Ground - Green; specified externally powered circuits - Orange. Graphic light wiring (24 volt maximum at the lamp socket) may be 22 AWG if properly fuse protected and terminated in a terminal block capable of accepting No. 14 AWG field wiring.

7. Wiring shall terminate at a master terminal board, rigid type and numbered. The master

terminal board shall have a minimum of 25 percent spares.

8. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated into groups (Power, AC control, DC signal, and alarm).

9. Terminal blocks shall be barrier type with the appropriate voltage rating (600 volts

minimum). Terminal strips shall be provided for the purpose of connecting all control and signal wiring. They shall be the raised channel mounted type as manufactured by Allen Bradley, or equal.

10. Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring shall be plastic type with snap on covers.

The side walls shall be open top type to permit wire changing without disconnecting. Trough shall be supported to the subpanel by stainless steel screws. Trough shall not be bonded to the panel with glue or adhesives.

11. Wire connectors shall be the hook fork type with insulated barrel for crimp type

compression connection to the wire.

12. Each wire shall be provided with numbered heat shrink tubing identification markers at both ends and the numbering shall be in accordance with the Control Panel Drawings. Identification markers shall be pretyped. Handwritten markers or paper markers will not be permitted.

13. Direct interlock wiring between equipment will not be allowed. Only one side of a

terminal block row shall be used for internal wiring. The field wiring side of the terminal shall not be within 6-inches of the side panel or adjacent terminal.


14. Wiring troughs shall not be more than 60 percent visible fill. Wiring trough covers shall

be match marked to identify placement. If component identification is shown on covers for visibility, the ID shall also appear on the mounting sub-panel.

15. Each panel shall have a single tube, fluorescent light fixture, 20 Watt in size, mounted

internally to the ceiling of the panel. Light fixture shall be switched and shall be complete with the lamp.

16. Each panel shall have a specification grade duplex convenience receptacle mounted

internally within a stamped steel device box with appropriate cover.

17. Each panel shall be provided with, for instrument power, Wiremold Company type 2100, or equal, plugmold raceway, with one outlet for each instrument plus 20 percent excess for future use.

18. Each panel shall be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus for all signal and

shield ground connections. Shield grounding shall be in accordance with the instrumentation manufacturer's recommendations.

19. Each panel shall be provided with a separate copper power grounding bus (safety) in

accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code.

20. Each panel, where applicable, shall be provided with analog signal isolation (I/I) where analog signals are sent from one panel or console to another.

21. Each panel shall be provided with surge suppression protection (electrical transients) for

connections between AC power systems and electrical and electronic equipment. Surge suppressor grounding shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

22. All wiring to hand switches and the like which are live circuits independent of the panel's

normal circuit breaker protection shall be clearly identified as such.

B. Relays not provided under Division 16 and required for properly completing the control function defined in this Section or shown on the Drawings shall be provided under this Section.

C. These relays shall be mounted in their respective panel and shall be clearly identified as being

live circuits independent of the panel's normal circuit breaker protection.

D. Nameplates shall be provided for flush mounted equipment. The nameplates shall be approximately 1-in x 3-in constructed of black and white laminated, phenolic material having engraved Helvetica letters approximately 1/4-in high, extending through the black face into the white layer. Nameplates shall be beveled and attached to panels by self tapping stainless steel screws. Adhesive bonded or glued on name plates shall not be accepted.

E. Print storage pockets shall be provided on the inside of each panel. Its size shall be sufficient

to hold all of the prints required to service the equipment.

F. Panels shall be factory tested prior to shipment. Field installation shall consist only of setting the panel in place and making necessary electrical and conduit connections.


G. Components shall be mounted in a manner that permits servicing, adjustment, testing, and

removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any other component.

H. Components shall be mounted on plates on the inside of panels in such a manner that allows for removal of the components without removal of the plate. Components shall not be mounted directly to the enclosure.

I. Internal components shall be identified with suitable plastic engraved name plates attached

with stainless steel drive pins adjacent to (not on) each component identifying the component in compliance with the Drawings, Specifications, and System Supplier's data.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS PANEL COMPONENTS

A. General Purpose Relays and Time Delays

1. Relays shall be double pole, double throw, octal plug in type with a transparent dust cover. The relay shall be equipped with an indicating light to indicate when its coil is energized. The mechanical life of the relay shall be 100,000,000 operations minimum.

2. Units shall be of the general purpose plug-in type.

a. Functional/Performance:

b. Coil voltage shall match supply voltage.

3. Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet the specified control function.

a. Mechanical life expectancy shall be in excess of 10,000,000.

b. Duty cycle shall be rated for continuous operation.

c. Units shall be provided with integral indicating light to indicate if relay is energized.

d. Solid state time delays shall be provided with polarity protection (DC units) and

transient protection.

e. Time delay units shall be adjustable and available in ranges from .1 second to 4.5 hours.

4. Physical:

a. For 120VAC service provide contacts rated 10 amps at 120VAC, for 24VDC service

provide contacts rated 5 amps at 28VDC, for electronic (milliamp/ millivolt) switching applicator provide gold plated contacts rated for electronic service.

b. Relays shall be provided with dust and moisture resistant covers.

5. Options/Accessories Required:

a. Provide mounting sockets with pressure type terminal blocks rated 300 volt and 10


amps.

b. Provide mounting rails/holders as required.

6. Manufacturers:

a. Eagle Signal Controls

b. Allen Bradley

c. Potter & Brumfield PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TESTS (GENERAL)

A. Panels and panel assemblies shall be tested for proper operation at the factory prior to the shipment of any panel to the jobsite.

B. Prior to shipment, a witnessed demonstration test shall be performed at the System Supplier's

factory on panels provided. The test shall demonstrate specified functions by simulating inputs and outputs to the panels.

C. Acceptance of shop tests by Owner or Engineer shall not constitute a waiver of

requirements to meet the field tests under specified operating conditions, nor does inspection relieve the manufacturer of his responsibility in any way.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 15020

FIELD ERECTION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 Scope

A. This specification covers the onsite handling, installation, alignment and testing of mechanical equipment. It is to be used in conjunction with other applicable engineering specifications, drawings and manufacturer's data that are pertinent to the installation of all equipment or to a specific item of equipment.

1.02 Manufacturer's Instructions

A. This specification is not intended to supersede the written procedures established by the equipment manufacturer for the installation, alignment and startup of his equipment nor to supersede instructions delivered by his job site service representative. Where such procedures have been established or job site representation exists, either shall take priority over this specification. However, certain conditions set forth in this specification shall be used in conjunction with manufacturer's installation information, when applicable.

1.03 Responsibility

A. When the installation and erection of equipment is to be performed by the equipment Vendor, as set forth in relevant purchase orders, all work performed by him or his representatives shall be in conformity with this specification and responsibility for the satisfactory performance of all work connected thereto shall be the Vendor's. In all other instances, conformity to this specification and work related thereto shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.04 Layout of Work

A. The concrete foundations and anchor bolts for the equipment are to be poured and set in accordance with other sections of the specification. The work under this specification covers the setting of the equipment correctly at the location shown on the drawings.

1.05 Receiving and Unloading

A. All material necessary to carry out the satisfactory completion of the work shall be received, unloaded and hauled to the job site by the Contractor.


1.06 Uncrating and Unloading

A. The equipment is to be uncrated with a minimum amount of breakage and splintering of the wood crate. In case part of the crate serves as a skid, this should be left bolted to the equipment until just prior to transfer of the equipment to its final location.

B. Only that crating necessary for mounting of the equipment shall be removed.

Protective wrappings, coatings, flange and nozzle covers, etc., shall not be removed until required.

C. The equipment shall be handled at all times so as to protect painted and machined

surfaces where exposed. Handling shall be done at points designated and all precautionary markings on the crate are to be followed explicitly so that equipment is not dented, marred, or unduly stressed.

D. Spare parts, instruments and controls which are not to be installed as part of this

work shall be marked with the purchase order number and stored by the Contractor. Glass gauges and exposed delicate parts attached to equipment shall be marked and safely stored by the Contractor. All parts stored by the Contractor are to be logged and turned over to the Owner upon completion of the project.

E. Instruction books, operating manuals, etc. on all mechanical equipment shall be

provided if required. Bound copies of the O&M manuals will be turned over to the Owner upon completion of the project.

F. All combustible material shall be removed from inside the buildings before the

end of each day. 1.07 Protection of Equipment

A. Every possible effort shall be made to prevent damage to equipment connections, internal parts, mounting surfaces, etc. Any damage to the equipment that has occurred during onsite handling and installation shall be repaired in a manner which will satisfy the Owner. All equipment that must be stored shall be properly protected to prevent damage by handling, environment and the elements of weather.

B. Equipment shall be stored on bolsters above high water and covered. Small or

delicate equipment shall be stored in a warehouse. All machined surfaces shall be protected with grease or a suitable coating. Any equipment subject to damage from possible falling objects or from the weather during or after erection shall be suitably protected.

1.08 Cleaning

A. All equipment shall be cleaned of all foreign material. Manholes, handholes and nozzles shall be utilized for access to internal parts. Protective coatings on nozzle faces and connections, and all visible oil or liquid used in cleaning shall


be subject to the approval of the Owner. No cleaning agent which dissolves or otherwise detrimentally affects a lining or protective material in or on a place of equipment shall be used on such equipment.

B. Upon completion of the cleaning process, covers and other protective closures

shall be replaced to prevent foreign matter from entering the equipment. Condition of equipment shall be subject to the approval of Owner before covers or closures are replaced.

C. Non-flammable cleaning fluid is to be used for cleaning.

1.09 Setting Equipment

A. All equipment supported on concrete shall be set level at the grouted height and firmly shimmed. Where the equipment is to be sloped, care shall be exercised that the required slope is provided. The orientation of drives, vents, hoppers, nozzles, etc., shall conform to installation drawings.

B. Equipment supported by steel structure is to be bolted directly to the structure

and set level with shims where necessary. Flat steel shims or shim stock shall be used and shall remain in place. Wedges or tapered shims shall not be used.

C. Care should be exercised in placing equipment over foundation bolts so that bolt

threads are not damaged. Each piece of equipment shall be correctly oriented and shall be wedded to the elevations indicated on the applicable drawings.

D. Vibration dampening mounts, when indicated, shall be carefully installed in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1.10 Base Plate Leveling

A. The Contractor shall level each unit when both driver and driven machine have been mounted on the base plate(s).

B. Before leveling, the coupling halves must be disconnected and should not be

reconnected until all alignment operations have been completed.

C. The base plate should be supported on rectangular metal blocks and shims. Support pieces should be placed close to the foundation bolts. The supports should also be directly under the part of the base plate carrying the greatest weight and spaced closely enough to give uniform support. A spacing of about 23 inches should be used on medium sized units. A gap of about 3/4 inch to 1-1/8 inch should be allowed between the base plate and the foundation for grouting.

D. The metal supports shall then be adjusted until the base plate is level in all

directions as indicated by an accurate level on the machined pads. E. When the unit is level, the foundation bolts should be brought down evenly but

not too firmly. The unit is now ready for grouting to its foundation.


1.11 Grouting

A. Wherever required, grouting of mechanical equipment shall be performed using a commercially available premixed, chemically inert, non-shrinking, thermosetting, high strength mixture, such as Embeco Grout, Ceilcote 648 Grout or equivalent. The preparation of surfaces, mix proportions, application procedures shall be followed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions.

B. Before grout has entirely set, but after it will no longer flow, the excess grout

shall be removed in accordance with the grout manufacturer's recommendations. At the same time, if shims or leveling pads are to be removed, the grout should be cut to facilitate removal of these items. The grout shall be allowed to set at least 72 hours after being placed before shims or leveling pads are withdrawn. Holes left by removal of these leveling devices shall be dry packed with grout material.

C. The equipment manufacturer's recommendations regarding removal of shims

shall be followed. Unless otherwise specified, shims and wedges shall be removed from under reciprocating equipment; shims and wedges may be left in place under stationary and rotary equipment such as vessels, centrifugal pumps, centrifugal compressors, etc.

D. After the grout has adequately set, pull the anchor bolts down tight and recheck

base for levelness. 1.12 Base Plate Field Drilling

A. When base plates are shipped to the job site not drilled for drive mounting, the following drilling procedure should be followed:

1. Locate the base plate on a flat, even surface. 2. Place the driver on the base plate with the driven equipment and adjust

the shaft ends separation to equal that shown on the vendor certified dimension drawing.

3. Check the alignment with a straight edge or dial indicator. The driver

coupling half flange should be slightly low to allow for final alignment shimming, but the sides of the driver and driven coupling flanges should be in good alignment.

4. Scribe the location of the hold down bolts, remove the driver from the

base plate, drill and tap holes for driver hold down bolts.

1.13 Attachments to Equipment

A. The equipment shall not be altered in any manner nor have attachments not indicated on the drawings without prior consent of the Owner.


1.14 Miscellaneous Steel Supports

A. When extra or special miscellaneous steel is required for supporting equipment and is not indicated on the drawings, no attachment of this supporting steel to the basic structure will be permitted without prior consent of the Owner.

1.15 Equipment Relocations

A. Existing equipment requiring relocations, shall be moved when released by the Owner. Such units shall be furnished free of connecting piping and less any instruments susceptible to damage. The work shall be so scheduled and coordinated with the Owner as to cause a minimum of disruption to other construction activities.

1.16 Cleanup

A. The external surface of all equipment shall be cleaned at the completion of the work to remove all concrete, dust and dirt, welding and cutting spatter, etc.

B. All pumps, tanks and other vessels shall be drained by the Contractor and have a

bottom connection left open to ensure that factory test liquids and field accumulated water will be removed. Tanks and vessels shall be opened, examined, and all sludge and debris removed.

1.17 Erection Supervision

A. When the equipment is being erected under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative or other authorized representative of Owner, full cooperation shall be given to the Owner, as to the date the services of a supervisor will be required at the site.

1.18 Painting

A. When equipment is delivered with shop or finish coats of paint, any misses,

marred, or abraded surfaces, resulting from shipping or handling, shall be touched-up as necessary to provide a complete film of paint. The finish coat of paint shall in all cases be uniform in color over the surface of the piece of equipment.

B. Name plates and codes stamping plates shall not be painted over. Any paint

inadvertently applied to such plates shall be removed. C. Gasket contact surfaces of flanges and covers, threads, and all moving parts of

equipment, as well as adjacent equipment and structures, shall be covered and protected while paint is applied.

1.19 Safety

A. All guards for moving or rotating parts shall be installed prior to operation.


B. All safety valves and equipment shall be checked for proper installation. C. After testing, all drivers shall be turned off, valves closed to isolate the

equipment, and equipment left in "safe" condition. D. All obstructions and debris shall be removed from the area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Vertical Equipment

A. Vertical equipment alignment procedure differs among different manufacturers and cannot be standardized herein. Such equipment shall be aligned in accordance with equipment manufacturers' recommended procedures.

2.02 Lubrication

A. In the installation and assembly of all equipment, the lubrication instructions furnished by the equipment manufacturer are to be strictly followed. All equipment shall be given initial lubrication by the Contractor before the equipment is run. Lubricants shall be furnished by the Contractor, and shall be Mobil products only.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Inspection

A. After erection, equipment shall be inspected by the Contractor in the presence of an authorized representative of the owner.

B. After installation of any piece of motor-driven equipment, the unit shall be

operated for a period determined by the Owner, sufficient to observe any excessive vibration, undue noise, overheating of bearings, incorrect direction of rotation, etc. At the conclusion of the observation period, only where leakage during test was observed, packing shall be checked and inspected.

C. A representative of the owner shall be present at all tests, and his approval shall

be given only after satisfactory test results have been obtained. Each sub-assembly shall be subject to the approval and acceptance by the Owner.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 015051

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL 1. Separation from Other Pipe Systems 1.1 Parallel Water and Sewer, Storm or Effluent Lines 1.1.1 Separation of Water and Other Lines: Sanitary sewer, storm drains, effluent lines or force mains shall be separated from water mains by a minimum clear vertical distance of eighteen inches (18") and a horizontal distance of ten feet (10'- 0").When this standard cannot be maintained, the non-potable line shall be concrete encased for a distance of ten feet (10') each way from the water line and any other conduit, with a minimum vertical clearance of twelve inches (12") being provided at all times. 1.2 Crossing Water and Sewer Lines 1.2.1 Water mains crossing over a non-potable line shall be (bottom of water main to top of non-potable line) separated by at least eighteen inches (18") unless local conditions or barriers prevent an eighteen inch (18") vertical separation. All crossings with vertical clearance less than eighteen inches (18") shall be made using pipe thickness Class 200 AWWA C900 PVC pipe for a distance of ten feet (10') each side of the crossing. The gravity sewer pipe in these locations shall be backfilled with USCS Class I bedding stone to a height of 6 inches above the crown of the pipe. 1.2.2 When water mains cross under a sewer, both mains shall be constructed of C900 Class 200 PVC pipe with joints equivalent to water main standards for a distance of ten feet (10') on each side of the point of crossing with no intermediate joints. Additionally, a section of water main pipe shall be centered at the point of crossing. 2. Flushing and Disinfection of Water Mains 2.1 Flushing Mains 2.1.1 All water lines shall be filled with potable water, pigged or swabbed, and flushed, under the supervision of CITY's personnel, via a full bore flush. A section of pipe shall be inserted in the gap specified in the jumper shown in the Standard Details to connect to the new construction to the existing facilities for the purpose of accomplishing the full bore flush. After completion of the flush, the connection shall be removed. The facilities shall be capped and returned to the jumper connection shown in the Standard Details until final connection is permitted by CITY at the completion of construction and after finalization of all test procedures and bacterial clearance for new water facilities. \ 2.2 Pressure Testing of Water Mains


2.2.1 Visual Examination Under Pressure: All exposed pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints will be carefully examined during the pressure test. All joints showing visible leaks shall be made tight. The pressure test shall be repeated until satisfactory to CITY. 2.2.2 All leaks evident at the surface shall be uncovered and repaired regardless of the total leakage as indicated by the test. All pipes, valves, and fittings and other materials found defective under the test shall be removed and replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Tests shall be repeated until leakage has been reduced below the allowable amount. 2.2.3 Expelling Air Before Test: Before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If hydrants or blow-offs are not available at the high places, taps shall be made to provide for air release valves. 2.2.4 The CONTRACTOR shall perform a pressure test of completed pressure mains. The CITY shall be notified of the test at least forty eight (48) hours in advance and will observe the test. The test shall be conducted for a period of two (2) hours at 150 psi pressure. Test procedure and allowable leakage shall be as specified for the appropriate pipe system in either AWWA C600, Section 13, or Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association Handbook of PVC Pipe, Chapter VI, Inspection and Testing - Pressure Pipe. 2.2.5 Simultaneously with the leak test, a hydrostatic test shall be performed. Test pressures shall not vary more than 5 PSI, for the duration of the test in accordance with AWWA C-600, Section 4.1, Paragraph 4. 2.3 Disinfection of Water Mains 2.3.1 After installation, leakage/pressure tests and all repairs on the water line have been completed, and the water lines flushed clean, water containing not less than fifty parts per million (50 ppm) chlorine (preferably 75 - 100 ppm) shall be placed in the line and allowed to stand at least forty eight (48) hours. After forty eight (48) hours, if the chlorine solution contains at least twenty five parts per million (25 ppm) of chlorine, the line may be flushed and samples taken at various points. 2.3.2 Chlorinating agent may be a chlorine gas-water mixture, calcium hypochlorite or chlorinated lime of known chlorine content, in water, and shall be fed through a suitable solution feed device located at or near the point from which the main is to be filled. Flow of both water and chlorine solution shall be at a slow rate and in such proportion that the required chlorine content is evenly distributed in the main. Air pockets shall be eliminated and system pressure applied. Following chlorination, all water shall be flushed from the lines until replacement water has a chlorine content not more than 0.1 ppm in excess of the residual in the water from the supplying main. 2.4 Bacteriological Testing


2.4.1 Water samples for bacteriological examination shall be taken by the CITY after receiving adequate notice (at minimum, forty eight (48) hours) from the CONTRACTOR. The lines shall not be placed in service until a negative bacteriological report is received. 3. Testing of Gravity Sanitary Sewer Lines 3.1 Watertight Construction 3.1.1 It is imperative that all sewers and force mains, manholes, and service connections be built watertight and that the CONTRACTOR adhere rigidly to the specifications for material and workmanship. Since of the water and sewage in the lines will be treated at the treatment plant, special care and attention must be given to securing watertight construction. After completion, the sewers or sections thereof will be tested and gauged. If infiltration or exfiltration is above the limits specified under 3.4 the sewer construction work will be rejected.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 015052

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – WATER MATERIALS

1. PIPE MATERIALS 1.1 Ductile Iron Pipe (all sizes) 1.1.1 Ductile iron pipe shall be the class and size called for on the drawings. In the absence of a specified class on the drawings, Ductile iron pipe shall be Class 51, as specified by AWWA Standard C151, latest revisions. 1.1.2 All Ductile iron pipe shall be lined with standard thickness cement mortar lining and asphaltic seal coat in accordance with AWWA Standard C104, latest revision. Pipe and fittings to have outside asphaltic coating as specified in AWWA Standard C151. Each piece of pipe shall bear a marking denoting the class to which it belongs. 1.1.3 Joints for Ductile iron pipe shall be mechanical or push-on type designed in accordance with AWWA C111. Gasket lubricant for push-on joints shall be as specified by the pipe manufacturer and labeled with the trade name and the pipe manufacturer's name. Other types of lubricant (vegetable fat, oil etc.) are prohibited from use. 1.1.4 Restrained joints, where shown on the plans, shall be as specified in paragraph 3.2.2. A working pressure of 350 psi for sizes six inches (6") through twenty four inches (24") and 250 psi for pipe sized larger than 24" shall be required, and shall conform to AWWA C110 or C153. Unless otherwise noted, the pipe, joints, gaskets, and accessories shall be in accordance with standards as previously specified for Ductile iron pipe in this section. 1.1.5 The distances shown in Table 1.2.1 shall apply to minimum lengths (in feet) of pipe required to be restrained on each side of the fittings. Tees, crosses, and dead ends shall be considered equivalent to ninety degree (90ø) bends. Tees shall be installed with a thrust block poured opposite of the branch line in addition to restrained joints in the direction of the branch line. Restraining is not required in the direction of the main longitudinal direction for tees and valves where there is no change in direction. Dead ends shall be installed with a terminus thrust block as shown on the plans.


Table I.2.1 Pipe 90ø Bend 45ø Bend 22ø Bend 11ø Bend 8" 74 31 15 7 10" 87 36 17 9 12" 100 41 20 10 16" 123 51 24 12 20" 143 59 29 14 24" 162 67 32 16 30" 184 76 37 18 36" 207 86 41 20 1.2 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (6" through 12" Water Mains) 1.2.1 Polyvinyl chloride pipe (PVC) shall conform to AWWA Specification C900, latest revision, shall be Class 150, and shall bear the seal of the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for potable water pipe. All pipe shall be marked with the manufacturer's name, nominal size, type of plastic and pressure rating. All PVC pipe used for water lines shall be blue. Pipe O.D. shall be equivalent to cast iron pipe of the same nominal size. PVC pipe buried beneath roadways, parking lots or parking lot entrances shall meet AWWA Specification C900, Class 200, latest revision. 1.2.2 Pipe joints shall include elastomeric gaskets and shall be integral bell type coupling, in accordance with ASTM F477 and D2122, latest revision respectively. Lubricant and gaskets are to be supplied with the pipe by the manufacturer of the pipe. 2. VALVES 2.1 Gate Valves - 6" through 16" 2.1.1 Valves shall conform to the latest revision of AWWA Standard C509 for resilient seated gate valves. 2.1.2 The valves shall be cast iron or ductile iron body with non-rising stem (NRS), opening by turning stem counter clockwise and provided with two inch (2") square operating nut with the word "Open" and an "Arrow" cast in the metal to indicate direction to open. 2.1.3 The wedge shall be of cast iron completely encapsulated with urethane rubber. The urethane sealing rubber shall be permanently bonded to the cast iron wedge to meet ASTM tests for rubber metal bond ASTM D429. 2.1.4 Stems for NRS assemblies shall be cast bronze with integral collars in full compliance with AWWA. OS&Y stems shall be on bronze bar stock. The NRS stem stuffing box shall be the O-ring seal type with two (2) rings located above thrust collar;


the two (2) rings shall be replaceable with valve fully open and subjected to full rated working pressure. The design of valves shall be such as to permit the replacement of O-ring(s) without undue leakage while the valves are wide open and in service. All valves of the same size and type shall be by the same manufacturer and shall be American made, cast and assembled. 2.1.5 All valves shall have a safe working pressure of two hundred (200) psi. 2.1.6 There shall be two (2) low torque thrust bearings located above and below the stem collar. The stem nut shall be independent of wedge and shall be made of solid bronze. There shall be a smooth unobstructed waterway free of all pockets, cavities and depressions in the seat area. 2.1.7 The body and bonnet shall be coated with fusion bonded epoxy both interior and exterior. Each valve shall have manufacturer's name, pressure rating and year in which manufactured cast on the body. Prior to shipment from factory, each valve shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the specified working pressure. 2.1.8 Gate Valves shall be American Darling, Clow, U.S. Pipe or Kennedy. All gate valves shall be American made. 2.2 Butterfly Valves - 16" and Larger 2.2.1 All butterfly valves shall fully comply with AWWA C504, latest revision. 2.2.2 Butterfly valves shall be of the tight-closing, rubber-seat type with rubber seats that are securely fastened to the valve body or disc. No metal-to-metal seating surfaces will be permitted. Valves shall be bubble-tight at rated pressures with flow in either direction, and shall be satisfactory for applications involving throttling service and/or frequent operation and for applications involving valve operation after long periods of inactivity. Valve discs shall rotate ninety degrees (90ø) from the full open position to the tight shut position. Valves shall meet the full requirements of AWWA Standard C504. 2.2.3 Valve bodies shall be constructed of cast iron ASTM A126 Class B and provide drip tight shut shut-offs up to full pressure rating. Mechanical joint shall be in conformance with AWWA C111. Two (2) tunnions for shaft bearings shall be integral with each valve body. Body thickness shall be in strict accordance with AWWA Standard C504, latest revision. 2.2.4 Valve discs shall be constructed of Ductile iron. 2.2.5 Shafts of all valves shall be turned, ground, and polished. Valve shafts shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel. Shaft diameters must meet minimum requirements established by AWWA Standard C504.


2.2.6 Valve seats shall be Buna-N. Seats may be simultaneously molded in, vulcanized and bonded to the valve body, or mechanically retained in the valve body or attached to the disc. Screws, retaining segments, etc., required to retain seat in body shall be constructed in Type 304 stainless steel. Seats mounted on discs are not acceptable unless they are completely replaceable without replacing the disc. 2.2.7 Valve operations shall be fully enclosed, gasketed and oil filled to withstand an external outer pressure of ten (10) psi minimum. 2.2.8 A valve position indicator shall be furnished for installation in each valve box. Indicator shall be hermetically sealed for installation inside a cast iron valve box and shall show valve disc position, direction of rotation and number of turns from fully opened to fully closed. Indicator shall be provided by the valve manufacturer, complete. 2.2.9 Valve shall open counter clockwise and be provided with a two inch (2") square operating nut which will have the direction of opening cast on it. Valve nut shall be no more than 30" underground. 2.2.10 Packing shall be self adjusting chevron-type. 2.2.11 Valve shall have self lubricating nylon sleeve type shaft bearings. 2.2.12 All surfaces of the valve shall be clean, dry and free from grease before painting. The valve surfaces except for disc, seating, and finished portions shall be evenly coated with a suitable primer to inhibit rust and with asphalt varnish in accordance with AWWA Standard 504, latest revision. 2.2.13 Prior to shipment from the factory, each valve shall be tested hydrostatically in accordance with AWWA Standard C504, latest revision. 2.2.14 Valves shall be Pratt, DeZurik or approved equal. All Butterfly valves shall be American made. 2.3 Valves for 2" Connections 2.3.1 All valves for air release system or bacterial sampling station shall be Mueller Oriseal Mark II or approved equal, ninety degree (90ø) turn on/off, with three-eighth inch (3/8") valve key. 2.3.2 Curb stops shall be Mueller Mark II Oriseal 2.3.3 Corporation stops shall be Mueller H 10045 2.3.4 Ball valves shall be Ford Brass Ball Valves 2.4 Air Release Valves


2.4.1 Air release valves shall be float operated and both the air/vacuum and air release functions shall be performed by a combination valve housed in a single body. The float shall be stainless steel capable of withstanding a test pressure of 750 psig minimum, and shall be located as directed by the ENGINEER. 2.4.2 The valve shall automatically exhaust large quantities of air during the filling of the pipeline. The air release port shall automatically release small pockets of air from the pipeline while the pipeline is in operation and under pressure. 2.4.3 The air release valve shall have a maximum working pressures of 150 psi, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, and shall have been tested at a pressure not less than 300 psi. 2.4.4 The materials of construction shall be: Body, cover, and baffle of cast iron; float and all other trim shall be of stainless steel with the exception of Buna-N seat. No plastic parts shall be accepted. 2.4.5 Air release valves shall be Empire Specialty Company Model 945, Combinetic Series or equal. 2.4.6 One-inch (1") NPT inlet and outlet shall be provided, unless otherwise specified on the drawings. 2.5 Check Valves 2.5.1 All check valve bodies shall be cast iron per ASTM A126 Class B, having integral (not wafer) flanges. 2.5.2 The seat shall be centrifugally cast bronze with an O-ring seal and be locked in place with stainless steel lock screws and be field replaceable, without the use of special tools. 2.5.3 The shaft shall be single and continuous stainless steel, extending both sides of the body with a lever and weight, using an air cushion cylinder, side mounted. 2.5.4 The air cushion cylinder shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant material and the piston shall be totally enclosed within the cylinder and not open at one end. The air cushion cylinder assembly shall be externally attached to either or both sides of the valve body and shall permit adjustability to cushion the closure of the valve. Cushioning shall be by air trapped in the cushion cylinder which shall be fitted with a one-way adjustable control check valve to cushion disc contact to the seat at the shut-off point. The bottom cylinder head shall be swivel mounted and not rigid to follow the change of force angles as the lever raises or lowers to open or close the check valve. Valve shall prevent backflow on normal pump shut-off or power failure, at zero velocity and be water tight.


2.5.5 The disc shall be cast iron utilizing a double clevice hinge connected to a Ductile iron disc arm. The disc arm assembly shall be suspended from a stainless steel shaft which passes through a seal retainer on both sides of the valve body. 2.5.6 Valve exterior to be painted with Red Oxide Phenolic Primer Paint as accepted by the FDA for use in contact with Potable Water. Materials shall be certified to the following ASTM specifications: Part Material Standard Body, cover, disc Cast Iron ASTM A126, Class B Disc Arm Ductile Iron ASTM A536 Seat Aluminum Bronze or ASTM B148 Stainless Steel ASTM A276 Disc Seat Buna-N or metal Cushion cylinder Corrosion-resistant Commercial material 3. Fittings and Appurtenances 3.1 Tees, Crosses, Reducers, etc. - 4" - 12" Tees, Crosses - 14" and Larger 3.1.1 All tees, crosses, reducers and other such materials shall be referred to as fittings. 3.1.2 All fittings shall be mechanical joint-type and shall be cast from Ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Glands and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 psi. Fittings shall have an epoxy outside coating in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53. All fittings shall be restrained in accordance with paragraph 3.2.2 of this section of these specifications. 3.1.3 Fittings shall be cement lined and seal coated with an asphaltic material in accordance with AWWA C104. 3.1.4 Bolts and nuts for all flanged and mechanical joints shall be high strength steel meeting the current provisions of American National Standard AWWA C111 for rubber gasket mechanical joints for cast iron or Ductile iron pipe and fittings or shall be type 304 stainless steel. Bolt manufacturers certification of compliance must accompany each shipment. 3.2 Fittings - Bends (Excluding Tees and Crosses) etc. - 6" and Larger


3.2.1 All bends and special fittings 6" and larger shall be restrained joint-type. 3.2.2 Restrained joint fittings shall be Ductile iron in accordance with applicable requirements of AWWA C110 (with the exception of the manufacturer's proprietary design dimensions) and either mechanical joint using Megalug retainer glands, or push-on joints for such fittings in accordance with AWWA C111. Push-on fittings shall be U.S. Pipe TR FLEX fittings or equal. Restraining devices for PVC pipe shall be epoxy coated Uni-flange series 1300 or series 1350. 3.2.3 Internal cement mortar linings and asphaltic seal coatings for pipe and fittings, where applicable, shall be in accordance with AWWA C104. External bituminous coatings for pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C151 for pipe and AWWA C110 for fittings. 3.2.4 Restrained push-on joints for pipe and fittings shall be designed for a water working pressure of 350 psi in sizes six inches (6") through twenty four inches (24") and 250 psi for larger sizes. 3.2.5 Push-on joints with restraint shall be capable of being deflected after assembly. 3.3 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 3.3.1 All tapping sleeve and valve assemblies shall meet the requirements of AWWA Standard C500, latest revision. Cast iron tapping sleeves 12" or larger or stainless steel wrap-around less than 12" and cast iron valves shall be used to make "wet" taps into the existing water mains where shown on the drawings. Sleeve bodies must be of carbon steel in accordance with ASTM A285, Grade C or stainless steel. The flanges must conform to AWWA C207 Class D ANSI 150# drilling. All bolts and nuts shall be as specified in paragraph 3.1.4. 3.3.2 CONTRACTOR shall verify type of existing main prior to ordering. The tapping valve shall have an inlet flange to match the sleeve and a mechanical joint outlet for connection to water main pipe. Tapping valve shall meet the requirements for gate valves Exhibit I, Part (2), in Section 2.1 above. The sleeve shall have provisions for a tap and be pressure tested at 150 psi for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to tapping. 3.4 Fire Hydrants 3.4.1 All fire hydrants shall conform to AWWA C502. Fire hydrants shall be traffic model, five and one-quarter inch (5¬") valve opening, two (2) - two and one half inch (2-1/2"), and one (1) four and one-half inch (4-1/2") outlets with National Standard threads, six inch (6") mechanical joint shoe connection, National Standard Pentagon (1-1/2" point to flat) operating nut, open CCW, dry top, sealed oil lubrication reservoir, seat ring to shoe shall be bronze to bronze. All hydrants shall meet or exceed AWWA Standard C504, latest revision.


3.4.2 All fire hydrants shall have break-away flanges (designed such that when the barrel is broken off the hydrant valve will remain closed and reasonably tight against leakage). 3.4.3 All fire hydrants must be installed not less than 18" or more than 24" from finished grade to center of nozzles. To achieve this, the CONTRACTOR may use fire hydrant extensions, or may order the proper bury depth hydrant. In either case, ordering the materials required to meet the proposed grade shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility, and shall be included in the bid price. 3.4.4 Fire hydrants shall be ordered without weep-holes. 3.4.5 Thrust blocks shall be located behind the shoe of the hydrant. After completing backfill around hydrant barrel, in accordance with these specifications, a poured concrete collar shall be installed, as shown in the Standard Details, to prevent the hydrant from moving if hit. 3.4.6 All hydrants shall be new red in color, or as specified by the CITY. 3.4.7 All hydrants shall be Mueller Centurion, Kennedy Guardian or American Darling 5 1/4" B-84-B. 3.4.8 All hydrants shall be of the year's manufacture when construction commenced and the year shall be clearly marked on the hydrant. 3.5 Blow-off Assembly 3.5.1 All dead end lines shall be temporarily ended with a blow off as shown on the Drawings. After full bore flush the blow off shall be replaced with a fire hydrant. 3.6 Tracer Tape 3.6.1 Three inch (3") wide metallized warning tape, color blue, marked "Caution - Water Line Below" shall be installed in the ditch over non-metallic pipe and shall be located twelve inches (12") below finished grade. Metallized tape shall be Terra Tape D as manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc., Houston Texas, or approved equal. 3.6.2 Three inch (3") wide polyethylene warning tape, color blue, marked "Caution - Water Line Below" shall be installed in the ditch over ductile iron pipe, twelve inches (12") below finished grade. 3.6.3 Within three inches of the pipe, CONTRACTOR shall place a #12 gauge color

coded wire. 3.7 Valve Boxes


3.7.1 Construction of Boxes: Valve boxes shall be cast iron from valve to finished grade, of the Roadway Extension type, of proper length and base size, with suitable detachable cover, and shall be coated inside and out with asphaltum paint. Valve boxes shall be Dewey Brothers VBX-TE 100 (6-5/16 inch cover), with #12 cover or approved equal. Valve boxes shall be made of close-grained, gray cast-iron in three pieces, as follows: a) The lower of base pieces, which shall be beveled at the bottom to fit around the stuffing-box gland, but must not rest on the valve bonnet or gear disc after installation. b) The upper barrel, which shall be flanged on the lower end, and of such size as to telescope over the lower base piece, the upper end being constructed in the form of a socket to receive the valve box cover. c) The valve box cover, which shall have cast on the upper surface, in raised letters, the word "water". 3.7.2 Valve Box Adjustment: All valve boxes shall be set plumb over the valve with the valve nut centered within. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust valve boxes to final grade at the time designated by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall build a reinforced concrete collar 18" x 18" x 6" with 2 - #4 reinforcing bars around the valve box head in pavement, flush to the grade of the top of the box. In unpaved areas, a similar concrete collar shall be poured with the top flush with the surrounding ground level. No extra payment shall be made for this item. Valve operating nut extensions shall be used to bring nut within thirty-six (36) inches of finished grade. 3.8 Bacterial Sample Points: For the purpose of new water main construction, bacterial sampling points shall be positioned at the beginning of each new system, at 1000 foot intervals and all dead ends unless otherwise directed. These sampling points will be utilized by CITY personnel or their representatives for water main bacterial clearance procedures. At the completion of the project, when authorization is given by the CITY or its representative, permanent sampling points shall remain every 3000 feet or one at the system midpoint, whichever distance is less, and all others shall be removed down to the main and properly capped by the CONTRACTOR. The permanent sampling points location will be reviewed by the CITY staff during final plan review. At the CONTRACTOR'S discretion, appropriately located fire hydrants may be utilized in lieu of the temporary sampling points specified above. Under this circumstance, the CONTRACTOR will be solely responsible for maintaining the hydrants in a satisfactory environment for conducting the bacterial testing. Use of the hydrants does not preclude the requirements for permanent sampling points as previously specified. 4. Steel Casing Pipe 4.1 Steel casing pipe shall be plain end, wrapped steel pipe, conforming to ASTM A252, Grade 2 or ASTM A139 without hydrostatic tests. The pipe shall have welded joints and


be in at least eighteen foot (18') lengths. Casing ends shall be sealed to prevent soil or pavement erosion. 5. Service Connection Materials 5.1 Service Saddles 5.1.1 Ductile iron pipe shall be tapped direct for one inch (1") and smaller taps unless otherwise shown on the plans. One inch (1") and smaller taps made to six inch (6") through twelve inch (12") PVC pipe may be tapped direct at the option of the CONTRACTOR. Such direct taps shall be made in accordance with Uni-Bell Recommended Practice (UNI-B-8). Service saddles or fittings shall be used with taps to all other types of pipe. Service saddles shall be used for taps larger than one inch (1") on all six inches (6") and larger C900 PVC pipe. Gasket shall be cemented in place and confined in a retaining groove. Saddles shall be brass double strapped. 5.1.2 Tapping sleeves and valves shall be used for all taps in excess of two inches (2"). 5.1.3 Service saddles on ductile iron pipe shall be Ford 202B, and on PVC pipe shall be Ford S 90, or approved equal, with AWWA threaded corporation stop connections. 5.2 Corporation Stops for Service Connections 5.2.1 Corporation stops shall meet the requirements of AWWA C800, and shall be Mueller H15008, or approved equal; ends AWWA thread x compression, CTS. 5.3 Water Service Tubing 5.3.1 Water service connection tubing shall be polyethylene municipal service tubing, color coded blue. 5.3.2 Polyethylene tubing shall meet the requirements of AWWA Standard C901. Polyethylene tubing shall be 3408 polyethylene. 5.4 Polyethylene Service Tube Stiffeners 5.4.1 A solid ring, stainless steel insert shall be installed with each and every compression connections made with polyethylene tubing. Inserts shall be beveled to prevent cutting into the tubing. 5.5 Air Release Valve Connections 5.5.1 Connections from corporation stops to air release valves shall be brass for rigidity.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16000

GENERAL ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to install complete and make operational, electrical and process instrumentation systems as specified and as shown on the Drawings.

C. Each bidder or their authorized representatives shall, before preparing their proposal,

visit all areas of the existing buildings and structures in which work under this sub-bid is to be performed and inspect carefully the present installation. The submission of the proposal by this bidder shall be considered evidence that they have visited the site, buildings and structures and noted the locations and conditions under which the work will be performed and that they takes full responsibility for a complete knowledge of all factors governing his/her work.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Excavation and backfilling, including gravel or sand bedding for underground electrical work is included in Division 2.

B. Cast in place concrete work, including concrete encasements for electrical duct banks,

equipment pads, light pole bases and reinforcing steel, is included in Division 3.

C. Except for directly controlled, single phase, unit heater thermostat wiring and all interlocking and termination wiring within the motor starter/motor control centers, all automatic temperature control wiring for heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment (thermostats, duct switches, P-E switches, dampers, automatic temperature control panels, etc) will be furnished and installed under Division 15, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

D. Refer to the Architectural floor plans for room and building dimensions.

E. Refer to HVAC and Process Mechanical Drawings for the exact location of mechanical,

instrumentation and process equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings for equipment, materials and other items furnished under Division 16.

B. Check shop drawings for accuracy and contract requirements prior to submittal. Shop

drawings shall be stamped with the date checked and a statement indicating that the shop drawings conform to Specifications and Drawings. This statement shall also list


all exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings. Shop drawings not so checked and noted shall be returned.

C. The Engineer's check shall be for conformance with the design concept of the project

and compliance with the Specifications and Drawings. Errors and omissions on approved shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of providing materials and workmanship required by the Specifications and Drawings.

D. All dimensions shall be field verified at the job site and coordinated with the work of all

other trades. E. Material shall not be ordered or shipped until the shop drawings have been approved. No

material shall be ordered or shop work started if shop drawings are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED - CONFIRM," "APPROVED AS NOTED - RESUBMIT" or "NOT APPROVED."

1.04 CONTRACT PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electric equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC) and with the latest edition of the following codes and standards:

1. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

6. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)

7. Instrument Society of America (ISA)

8. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

9. Factory Mutual (FM)

10. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA)


opening shall apply. 1.05 PRIORITY OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. If, during the performance of the work, the Contractor finds a conflict, error or discrepancy between or among one or more of the Sections or between or among one or more Sections and the Drawings, furnish the higher performance requirements. The higher performance


requirement shall be considered the equipment, material, device or installation method which represents the most stringent option, the highest quality or the largest quantity.

B. In all cases, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, but work not dimensioned

shall be as directed by the Engineer and work not particularly shown, identified, sized, or located shall be the same as similar work that is shown or specified.

C. Detailed Drawings shall govern over general drawings, larger scale Drawings take precedence

over smaller scale Drawings, Change Order Drawings shall govern over Contract Drawings and Contract Drawings shall govern over Shop Drawings.

D. If the issue of priority is due to a conflict or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract

Documents and any referenced standard, or code of any technical society, organization or association, the provisions of the Contract Documents will take precedence if they are more stringent or presumptively cause a higher level of performance. If there is any conflict or discrepancy between standard specifications, or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or between Laws and Regulations, the higher performance requirement shall be binding on the Contractor, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

E. In accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, the Contractor accepts the fact that

compliance with the priority order specified shall not justify an increase in Contract Price or an extension in Contract Time nor limit in any way, the Contractor's responsibility to comply with all Laws and Regulations at all times

1.09 CODES, INSPECTION AND FEES

A. Equipment, materials and installation shall comply with the requirements of the local authority having jurisdiction.

B. Obtain all necessary permits and pay all fees required for permits and inspections.

1.10 TESTS AND SETTINGS

A. Test systems and equipment furnished under Division 16 and repair or replace all defective

work and equipment. Refer to the individual equipment sections for additional specific testing requirements.

B. Make adjustments to the systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation of

the systems.

C. In addition to the specific testing requirements listed in the individual sections, the following minimum tests and settings shall be performed.

1. Mechanical inspection, testing and settings of circuit breakers, disconnect switches,

protection relays, motor starters, overload relays, control circuits and equipment for proper operation.

2. Check the full load current draw of each motor. Where power factor correction capacitors

are provided the capacitor shall be in the circuit at the time of the measurement. Check ampere rating of thermal overloads for motors and submit a typed record to the Engineer of the same, including MCC cubicle location and driven load designation, motor service


factor, horsepower, and Code letter. If incorrect thermal overloads are installed replace same with the correct size overload.

3. Check power and control power fuse ratings. Replace fuses if they are found to be of the

incorrect size.

4. Check settings of the motor circuit protectors. Adjust settings to lowest setting that will allow the motor to be started when under load conditions.

5. Check motor nameplates for correct phase and voltage. Check bearings for proper

lubrication. 6. Check rotation of motors prior to testing the driven load. Disconnect the driven equipment

if damage could occur due to wrong rotation. If the rotation is for the driven equipment is not correct, disconnect the motor lead connections at the motor terminal box and reconnect for proper rotation.

7. Check interlocking, control and instrument wiring for each system and/or part of a system

to prove that the system will function properly as indicated by control schematic and wiring diagrams.

8. Inspect each piece of equipment in areas designated as HAZARDOUS to insure that

equipment of proper rating is installed.

9. Verify all terminations at transformers, equipment, panels and enclosures by producing a 1, 2, 3 rotation on a phase sequenced motor when connected to "A," "B" and "C" phases.

10. Test the grounding system using the three point fall in potential method.

11. Test all 600 Volt wire insulation with a meg-ohm meter after installation. Make tests at not

less than 500V. Submit a written test report of the results to the Engineer. 1.11 SIZE OF EQUIPMENT

A. Investigate each space in the structure through which equipment must pass to reach its final location. Coordinate shipping splits with the manufacturer to permit safe handling and passage through restricted areas in the structure.

B. The equipment shall be kept upright at all times during storage and handling. When equipment

must be tilted for passage through restricted areas, brace the equipment to insure that the tilting does not impair the functional integrity of the equipment.

1.12 EQUIPMENT INTERCONNECTIONS

A. Review shop drawings of equipment furnished under other Divisions of this Specification and prepare coordinated wiring interconnection diagrams or wiring tables. Submit copies of wiring diagrams or tables with Record Drawings.

B. Furnish and install all equipment interconnections.


1.13 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment shall be new.

B. Material and equipment of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer and shall be UL listed.

C. Provide Quality Control.

D. Warrant all equipment furnished under Division 16 in accordance with Section 01740. Refer to

individual equipment sections for additional warranty items. 1.14 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify equipment (disconnect switches, separately mounted motor starters, control stations, etc) furnished under Division 16 with the name of the equipment it serves. Motor control centers, control panels, panelboards, switchboards, switchgear, junction or terminal boxes, transfer switches, etc, shall have nameplate designations as shown on the Drawings.

B. Nameplates shall be engraved, laminated plastic, not less than 1/16-in thick by 3/4-in by

2-1/2-in with 3/16-in high white letters on a black background.

C. Nameplates shall be screw mounted to NEMA 1 enclosures. Nameplates shall be bonded to all other enclosure types using an epoxy or similar permanent waterproof adhesive. Two sided foam adhesive tape is not acceptable. Where the equipment size does not have space for mounting a nameplate the nameplate shall be permanently fastened to the adjacent mounting surface.

1.16 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS

A. Unless specifically stated to the contrary, the Drawings are not intended to show exact locations of conduit runs. Coordinate the conduit installation with other trades and the actual supplied equipment.

B. Install each 3 phase circuit in a separate conduit unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

C. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, conduit shown exposed shall be installed exposed;

conduit shown concealed shall be installed concealed.

D. Where circuits are shown as "home-runs" all necessary fittings and boxes shall be provided for a complete raceway installation. Where home-runs indicate conduit is to be installed concealed or exposed the entire branch circuit shall be installed in the same manner. Unless otherwise indicated install branch circuit conduits exposed in process/industrial type spaces and concealed in finished spaces.

E. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles

prior to installation.

F. Except where dimensions are shown, the locations of equipment, fixtures, outlets and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Exact locations shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer during construction. Obtain information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as


directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner.

G. Circuit layouts are not intended to show the number of fittings, or other installation details.

Furnish all labor and materials necessary to install and place in satisfactory operation all power, lighting and other electrical systems shown.

H. Redesign of electrical or mechanical work, which is required due to the Contractor's use of an

alternate item, arrangement of equipment and/or layout other than specified herein, shall be done by the Contractor at his/her own expense. Redesign and detailed plans shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. No additional compensation will be provided for changes in the work, either his/her own or others, caused by such redesign.

I. It is the intent of these Specifications that the Electrical Systems shall be suitable in every way

for the service required. All materials and all work that may be implied as being incidental to the work of this Section shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUITS AND FITTING

A. Rigid Steel Conduit

1. Rigid steel conduit interior and exterior shall be hot-dipped galvanized and be as manufactured by the Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.; Wheatland Tube Co.; Triangle PWC Inc. or equal.

B. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit

1. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall have a minimum 0.040-in thick, polyvinyl chloride

coating permanently bonded to hot-dipped galvanized steel conduit and an internal chemically cured urethane or enamel coating. The ends of all couplings, fittings, etc, shall have a minimum of one pipe diameter in length of PVC overlap. PVC conduit and fittings shall be manufactured by Occidental Coating Company; "Plasti-Bond Red" as manufactured by Robroy Industries; Triangle PWC Inc. or equal.

C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit

1. Rigid aluminum conduit shall be 6063 alloy and shall be as manufactured by New Jersey

Aluminum Corp.; AFC Co.; VAW of America, Inc. or equal.

D. Intermediate Metal Conduit

1. Intermediate metal conduit shall be hot-dipped or electro-galvanized steel as manufactured by Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.; Triangle PWC Inc.; Wheatland Tube Co. or equal.

E. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit

1. PVC conduit shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride schedule 40 and 80 as manufactured by

Carlon; An Indian Head Co.; Kraloy Products Co., Inc.; Highland Plastics Inc. or equal.


F. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit, Couplings and Fittings

1. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be Sealtite, Type UA, manufactured by the Anaconda Metal Hose Div.; Anaconda American Brass Co.; American Flexible Conduit Co., Inc.; Universal Metal Hose Co. or equal.

2. Fittings used with liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be of the screw-in type as

manufactured by the Thomas & Betts Co.; Crouse-Hinds Co. or equal.

G. Flexible Couplings

1. Flexible couplings shall be type ECGJH as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.; Appleton Electric Co.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. or equal.

H. Boxes and Fittings

1. Pressed steel switch and outlet boxes shall be hot-dipped galvanized as manufactured by

the Raco Manufacturing Co.; Adalet Co.; O.Z. Manufacturing Co. or equal.

2. For use in NEMA 1 areas, terminal boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes etc, shall be galvanized sheet steel with continuously welded seams. Box bodies shall be flanged and shall not have holes or knockouts. Box bodies shall not be less than 14 gauge metal and covers shall not be less than 12 gauge metal. Covers shall be gasketed and fastened with stainless steel screws. Terminal boxes shall be furnished with hinged doors, terminal mounting straps and brackets. Terminal blocks shall be NEMA type, not less than 20 Amps, 600 Volt. Boxes shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.; Lee Products Co.; Keystone/Rees, Inc. or equal.

3. NEMA 4 terminal boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, etc, shall be sheet stainless steel

unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Boxes shall have continuously welded seams and mounting feet. Welds shall be ground smooth. Boxes shall be flanged and shall not have holes or knockouts. Box bodies shall not be less than 14 gauge metal and covers shall not be less than 12 gauge metal. Covers shall have a continuous gasket on all four sides and be fastened with stainless steel clamps. Terminal boxes shall be furnished with hinged doors, terminal mounting straps and brackets. Terminal blocks shall be NEMA type, not less than 20 Amp, 600 Volt. Boxes shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.; Lee Products Co.; Keystone/Rees, Inc. or equal.

4. NEMA 4X terminal boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes shall be fiberglass reinforced

plastic with stainless steel hardware and covers having a continuous gasket on all four sides. Terminal boxes shall be furnished with hinged doors, terminal mounting straps and brackets. Terminal blocks shall be NEMA type, not less than 20 Amps, 600 Volt. Boxes shall be as manufactured by Hoffman Engineering Co.; Lee Products Co.; Keystone/Rees, Inc. or equal.

5. Explosion-proof boxes shall be designed for Class 1, Group D, Division 1 hazardous

locations. They shall be cast iron with cadmium-zinc or hot-dipped galvanized finish, stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized bolts; Type EJB as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Company; Appleton Electric Co.; The Pyle-National Co. or equal.

6. All boxes and fittings used with PVC coated conduit shall be furnished with a PVC coating

bonded to the metal, the same thickness as used on the coated steel conduit. The ends of


couplings and fittings shall have a minimum of one pipe diameter PVC overlap to cover threads and provide a seal.

7. Cast or malleable iron device boxes shall be Type FD. All cast or malleable iron boxes and

fittings shall have cadmium-zinc finish with cast covers and stainless steel screws as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co. or equal.

8. Cast aluminum device boxes shall be Type FD. All cast aluminum boxes and fittings shall

be copper-free aluminum with cast aluminum covers and stainless steel screws as manufactured by the Killark Electric Co.; Crouse-Hinds Co.; L. E. Mason Co. or equal.

9. Steel elbows and couplings shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Elbows and couplings used

with PVC coated conduit shall be furnished with a PVC coating bonded to the steel, the same thickness as used on the coated steel conduit.

10. Conduit hubs shall be as manufactured by Myers Electric Products, Inc. or equal.

11. Conduit wall and floor seals for sleeved openings shall be type CSMI as manufactured by

the O.Z./Gedney Co. or equal.

12. Explosion proof fittings shall be as manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Co.; Appleton Electric Co.; O.Z./Gedney Co. or equal.

13. Conduit sealing bushings shall be O.Z./Gedney Type CSB or equal. 14. Combination expansion-deflection fittings embedded in concrete shall be Type XD as

manufactured by Crouse-Hinds Co.; Type AXDX as manufactured by O.Z./Gedney Co. Type DF as manufactured by Appleton Electric Co. or equal.

15. Combination expansion-deflection fittings installed exposed shall be Type XD as

manufactured by Crouse-Hinds Co.; Type AXDX as manufactured by O.Z./Gedney Co. Type DF as manufactured by Appleton Electric Co. or equal.

I. Conduit Mounting Equipment

1. In dry indoor areas, hangers, rods, backplates, beam clamps, channel, etc shall be galvanized iron or steel.

J. Wall and Floor Slab Opening Seals

1. Wall and floor slab openings shall be sealed with "FLAME-SAFE" as manufactured by the

Thomas & Betts Corp.; Pro Set Systems; Neer Mfg. Co.; Specified Technologies, Inc. or equal.

K. Cold Galvanizing Compound

1. Cold galvanizing compound shall be as manufactured by ZRC Products Company, a

division of Norfolk Corp. or equal. 2.02 WIRE, CABLE AND ACCESSORIES


2.03 WIRING DEVICES

A. Wall switches shall be heavy duty, specification grade, toggle action, flush mounting quiet type. All switches shall conform to the latest revision of Federal Specification WS 896. Wall switches shall be of the following types and manufacturer:

1. Single pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 1991, or equal by Harvey

Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc. or equal.

2. Double pole, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 1992, or equal by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc. or equal.

3. Three way, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 1993, or equal by Harvey


4. Four way, 20 Amp, 120/277 Volt - Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 1994, or equal by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc. or equal.

5. Explosion-proof single pole factory sealed switches shall be for 20 Amps, 120/277 Volts,

mounted in copper free aluminum or malleable iron cast boxes and be similar and equal to Crouse-Hinds EDS Series, or equal by Appleton Electric Co. or Killark.

B. Receptacles shall be heavy duty, specification grade of the following types and manufacturer or

equal. Receptacles shall conform to Federal Specification WC596-F.

1. Duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 5362, or equal by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc.

2. Weatherproof/corrosion resistant single, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2P, 3W, with cover;

Crouse-Hinds Co., Catalog No. WLRS-5-20, or equal by Appleton Electric.

3. Weatherproof/corrosion resistant duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2P, 3W, with cover; Crouse-Hinds Co., Catalog No. WLRD-5-20 or equal by Appleton Electric.

4. Ground fault interrupter, duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2P, 3W, GFCI feed thru type with

"test" and "reset" buttons. Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. GF5342 or equal by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc. or equal.

5. Single, "power lock," 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 23030 and plug

Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 23035N or equal by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc. or equal.

6. Single, 20 Amp, 250 Volts, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 5861 or equal by Harvey


7. Single twist-lock, 20 Amp, 250 Volts, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 6210; plug: Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 6212 or equal by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc. or equal.

8. Single twist-lock, 30 Amp, 250 Volts, 2P, 3W; Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 6340; plug:

Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 6342 or equal by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc. or equal.


9. Explosion-proof single, 20 Amp, 125 Amp, 2P, 3W; Appleton Electric, Catalog No.

CPCI-2350 and plug, Appleton Electric, Catalog No. CPP-2033 or equal by Crouse-Hinds; Harvey Hubbell Inc.

10. Explosion-proof duplex, 20 Amp, 125 Volt, 2P, 3W; Appleton Electric, Catalog No.

CPC2-2350 and plug, Appleton Electric, Catalog No. CPP-2023 or equal by Crouse-Hinds; Harvey Hubbell, Inc.

C. Device Plates

1. Plates for indoor flush mounted devices shall be of the required number of gangs for the

application involved and shall be as follows:

a. Administration type buildings: Smooth, high impact nylon of the same manufacturer and color as the device. Final color to be as selected by the Architect.

b. Where permitted in other areas of the plant, flush mounted devices in cement block

construction shall be Type 302 high nickel (18-8) stainless steel of the same manufacturer as the devices.

2. Plates for indoor surface mounted device boxes shall be cast metal of the same material as

the box, Crouse-Hinds, No. DS23G and DS32G, or equal.

3. Oversized plates shall be installed where standard plates do not fully cover the wall opening.

4. Device plates for switches mounted outdoors or indicated as weatherproof shall be

gasketed, cast aluminum with provisions for padlocking switches "On" and "Off," Crouse Hinds, No. DS185, or equal.

5. Multiple surface mounted devices shall be ganged in a single, common box and provided

with an adapter, if necessary, to allow mounting of single gang device plates on multigang cast boxes.

6. Engraved device plates shall be provided where required.

7. Weatherproof, gasketed cover for GFI receptacle mounted in a FS/FD box shall be

Arrow-Hart, Catalog No. 4501-FS or equal by Harvey Hubbell, Inc.; Pass & Seymour, Inc. or equal.

D. Three Phase Power Receptacles

1. Three phase power receptacles and plugs shall be rated for the voltage and current ratings

of the connected load or as specified.

2. Receptacles and plug housings shall be constructed of hi-impact, corrosion resistant non-metallic materials. Hardware shall be stainless steel.

3. Performance

a. Maximum working voltage: 600 Volts RMS.


b. Dielectric withstand voltage: 3000 Volts.

c. Full load break capability at rated current. d. 5000 connect/disconnect cycles at rated voltage and current.

4. Furnish and install one mating plug with each receptacle.

5. Provide the following features:

a. Color coded by voltage.

b. One piece housing/angled backbox

c. Shrouded pins

d. Self closing gasketed cover.

e. Watertight cable entrances/stress relief grips.

f. Mating keys.

6. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Hubbell (North American Rated Series II)

b. General Electric

c. Arrow-Hart

E. Interlocked Three Phase Power Receptacles

1. Interlocked three phase power receptacles shall include a combination receptacle and a

mechanically interlocked disconnect switch. The two units shall be interlocked to prevent removal or insertion of the plug unless the switch is in the OFF position.

2. Provide a matching plug for every unit furnished.

3. Switch, power receptacle and mating plug shall be constructed of hi-impact, corrosion

resistant non-metallic material.

4. Assemble shall be listed to UL 498 for watertight-construction.

5. Hardware shall be stainless steel.

6. Performance: a. Maximum working voltage: 600 Volts RMS.

b. Dielectric withstand voltage: 3000 Volts.


c. Full load break capability at rated current.

d. 5000 connect/disconnect cycles at rated voltage and current.

7. Provide the following features:

a. Color coded by voltage.

b. One piece housing/angled backbox

c. Shrouded pins

d. Self closing gasketed cover.

e. Watertight cable entrances/stress relief grips.

f. Mating keys.

8. The disconnect switch shall be unfused with ratings as hereinbefore specified. Provide lockout provisions on the disconnect switch handle.

9. Acceptable manufacturers:

a. Crouse-Hinds

b. Appleton

c. Killark

d. Hubbell

F. Portable Generator Input Receptacle

1. Portable generator input receptacle shall be weatherproof, rated for 600 Volts, 100 Amp, 3

Ph, 4 Wire grounding pin-and-sleeve type with a 15 degree mounting adapter, spring door cover and be Crouse-Hinds, Catalog No. 1042S22 or equal with plug, Crouse-Hinds, Catalog No. APJ-10487S22, or equal.

2. Both receptacle and plug shall have reversed contacts.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Disconnect Switches

1. Disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, visible blades, 600 Volt, 3 Pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange mounted operating handle.

B. Fused Disconnect Switches


1. Fused disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, visible blades, 600 Volt, 3 Pole with full cover interlock, interlock defeat and flange mounted operating handle.

2. Fuses shall be rejection type, 600 Volt, [200,000] A.I.C., dual element, time delay, Gould

Shawmut Inc.; Littelfuse Power Fuse Division or equal.

C. Manual Motor Starters

1. Manual starters shall be suitable for the voltage and number of phase shown on the Drawings and shall be non-reversing, reversing or two speed type as shown on the Drawings. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horse-powers shown on the Drawings. Manual starters shall have motor overload protection in each phase.

D. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters

1. Motor starters shall be a combination un-fused disconnect switch and contactor, 2 or 3 Pole, single or 3 phase as required, 60 Hz, 600 Volt, magnetically operated, full voltage non-reversing where shown on the Drawings. NEMA sizes shall be as required for the horse-powers shown on the Drawings. Disconnect switches shall be quick-make, quick-break with operating mechanism mounted on a fixed portion of the enclosure. Door mounted mechanisms will not be acceptable.

2. Two speed starters shall be for single or two winding motors as shown on the Drawings.

3. Each motor starter shall have a 120 Volt operating coil and control power transformer.

Three phase starters shall have three overload relays. One normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contact shall be provided as spares in addition to contacts shown on the Drawings.

4. Overload relays shall be adjustable and manually reset. 5. Furnish built-in control stations and indicating lights where shown on the Drawings.

6. NEMA 4 enclosures shall be stainless steel

7. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel.

8. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum.

9. Combination magnetic motor starters shall be as manufactured by the Square D Co.; Cutler

Hammer Co.; General Electric Company; Siemens Company or equal.

E. Circuit Breakers

1. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breaker in NEMA Type 3R Enclosure with externally operated handle. Circuit breakers shall be fully rated for 22,000 Amps RMS symmetrical.


2. Circuit breakers shall be manufactured by Cutler Hammer Co.; General Electric Company; Siemens Company or equal.

F. Control Stations

1. Control stations shall be heavy-duty type, with full size operators. Momentary contact stop

buttons shall have a lockout latch that can be padlocked in the open position.

2. NEMA 4 enclosures shall be stainless steel.

3. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be stainless steel.

4. NEMA 7 enclosures shall be cast aluminum.

5. Control stations shall be Square D Class 9001; Cutler Hammer Co.; General Electric Company; Allen Bradley Company or equal.

G. General Purpose Dry Type Transformers

1. Transformers shall be dry type, two-winding with kVA and voltage ratings as shown on the

Drawings.

2. Four full capacity taps shall be furnished, two 2-1/2 percent above and two 2-1/2 percent below rated primary voltage.

3. Maximum temperature rise shall be 115 degrees C. Windings shall be copper.

4. Transformers shall be built in accordance with ANSI C89.2 and NEMA ST-20.

5. Transformers shall be furnished with mounting hardware.

6. Transformers shall be manufactured by the Square D Co.; Cutler Hammer Co.; General

Electric Company or equal.

H. Transformer-Panel Assembly

1. Manufacturers

a. Cutler-Hammer, Mini-Power Center

b. Square D, Mini-Power Zone

c. General Electric, Servicenter

2. Ratings

a. kVA and voltage ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings.

b. Units shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA, for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96.


c. Transformer sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA levels for self-cooled ratings.

3. Construction

a. Each TPA shall include a main primary breaker, an encapsulated dry-type transformer,

and a secondary panelboard with main breaker.

b. Main primary, secondary, and feeder breakers shall be enclosed with a padlockable hinged door.

4. Bus

a. Panelboard bus shall be copper sized to NEMA 65 degrees C rise.

5. Wiring/Terminations

a. All interconnecting wiring between the primary breaker and transformer, secondary

main breaker and transformer, and distribution section shall be factory installed.

b. All transformers shall be equipped with a wiring compartment suitable for conduit entry and large enough to allow convenient wiring.

6. Main Devices

a. Each TPA shall include a main primary breaker with an interrupting rating of 22 kA at

480 Volts; and a secondary panelboard with main breaker rated 10 kA interrupting rating at 240 Volts.

7. Feeder Devices

a. The secondary distribution section shall accommodate one inch, plug-in breakers with

10 kA interrupting capacity.

8. Enclosure

a. The enclosure shall be made of heavy-gauge steel and the maximum temperature of the enclosure shall not exceed 90 degrees C.

b. The enclosure shall be totally enclosed, non-ventilated, NEMA Type 3R, with lifting

eyes.

I. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS)

1. TVSS unit shall be a hybrid device utilizing SAD (Silicon Avalanche Diodes), MOV (Metal Oxide Varistors) and CAP (Capacitors) technology.

2. The TVSS unit shall be listed under UL 1449-Second Edition and UL 1283 for noise

attenuation devices.

3. Unit shall have:


a. Parallel Line-Neutral, Line-Ground and Neutral-Ground connection configuration.

b. One Nanosecond or less response time.

c. Extend noise filtration with a 10 kHZ to 100 MHZ range.

d. Fused internal disconnect switch with 60 Amps, 300,000 AIC rating.

e. Surge current rating of 320,000, (400,000), (480,000) Amps

f. LED indications

g. Six digit surge counter

h. Form C output contacts

i. 480/277 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Grounded voltage configuration.

j. NEMA 12 (4) enclosure

4. TVSS shall be Model PDX3 as manufactured by United Power Corporation; Transtector Systems; Current Technology or equal.]

I. Lightning Arrester and Surge Capacitor

1. Lightning arrester shall be 650 Volt, 3 Phase, "Tranquell" type; General Electric Co.,

Catalog No. 9L15ECC001 or equal.

2. Surge Capacitor shall be 650 Volt, 3 Phase, non-toxic liquid insulated, General Electric Company's, Catalog No. 9L18BAB301 or equal.

J. Automatic Transfer Switches (480 Volt Applications)

1. Automatic transfer switches shall be designed for an emergency and normal source of 480

Volt, 3 Phase, 3 Wire, 60 Hz. Current ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. Switches shall be listed under UL 1008.

2. The switches shall initiate transfer of the load to the emergency source when any phase of

the normal source drops below 90 percent of normal voltage.

3. The transfer switches shall be adequately constructed to carry full rated current on a continuous 24 hour basis in all approved enclosures and shall not show excessive heating or be subject to de-rating. The transfer switches shall be capable of withstanding all available system fault currents without parting of or damage to contacts during the fault clearing time of the system over-current device.

4. The transfer switches shall be of inherently 3 Pole double throw construction and shall have

three position operations: closed to normal source, open, closed to emergency source. Time delay between opening of the closed contacts and closing of the open contacts shall be a minimum of 400 milliseconds to allow for voltage decay before transfer is complete.

5. The following accessories shall be furnished:


a. Close differential adjustable phase sensing relay set to drop out at 80 percent of rated

voltage and pick up at 90 percent of rated voltage.

b. Adjustable 0.5 to 6.0 second tune delay to override normal source power outages (set at 2 seconds).

c. Two auxiliary contacts to open on normal source failure (for combustion air damper

control).

d. Two auxiliary contacts to close on normal source failure (for remote alarm and engine start).

e. Neutral (off) position adjustable time delay 0.1 to 10 seconds.

f Auxiliary contacts to open 0 to 30 seconds (adjustable) before transfer to either normal

or emergency source and to close after transfer has occurred. These contacts are to cause variable frequency drive controllers to come to a controlled stop before transfer to either source and allow re-start after transfer has occurred. Each transfer switch shall have one set of these contacts for each current-source variable frequency drive controller connected downstream.

g. Adjustable time delay on retransfer to normal (1 to 300 seconds) with 0 to 25 minute

adjustable unloaded engine running time after retransfer.

6. Enclosure type shall be NEMA 1. Paint color shall be ANSI Z55.1, No. 61, light gray.

7. Automatic transfer switches shall have the following 10 cycle withstand ratings:

Switch Rating Withstand Rating

100 to 200 Amps 22,000 Amps at 480 Volts RMS SYM 225 to 800 Amps 40,000 Amps at 480 Volts RMS SYM 1000 to 1600 Amps 50,000 Amps at 480 Volts RMS SYM

8. A maintained contact test-auto switch and normal/emergency pilot lights shall be mounted

on the door.

9. Automatic transfer switches shall be Russelectric, Type RMTD; Automatic Switch Company; Onan Company or equal.

K. Manual Transfer Switch

1. The manual transfer switch shall be heavy duty, 4 Pole, 600 Volt, double throw, with direct

manual operation and shall be listed under UL-1008. Switch ratings shall be as shown on the Drawings. Enclosure type shall be NEMA 1.

2. Manual transfer switches shall be ASCO, Model 386; or equal.

L. Main Circuit Breaker and Meter Socket


1. Thermal magnetic molded case circuit breaker 480 Volt, 3 Pole, 22,000 AIC/100 Amps. Main circuit breaker type shall be coordinated with the automatic transfer switch to obtain 22,000 Amps withstand/closing.

2. Provide meter socket as required by power company.

M. Control Relays

1. Control relays shall be heavy duty machine tool type, with 10 Amps, 300 Volt convertible

contacts. Number of contacts and coil voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. General use relays shall be General Electric Co., Catalog No. CR120B or equal by Square D Co. or Allen-Bradley Co. Latching relays shall be General Electric Co., CR120BL, equal by Square D Co. or Allen-Bradley Co.

2. Time delay relays shall be pneumatic, 600 Volt, 20 Amp contacts, with calibrated knob

operated adjustment. On delay and off delay types and timing ranges shall be as shown on the Drawings. Relays shall be Agastat, Model 7012 or 7022 or equal.

N. Polyethylene Warning Tape

1. Warning tape shall be red polyethylene film, 6-in minimum width.

2. Warning tape shall be W.H. Brady Co., Catalog No. 91296 or equal.

O. Heat Tracing

1. Heat trace tape shall be temperature self-limiting type rated 5 watts per foot at 50 degrees F, 120 Volt, 60 Hz and shall be Chemelex, Catalog No. 5BTV1 with stainless steel overbraid and fluoropolymer outer jacket or equal.

2. Ambient air temperature sensing thermostat shall be adjustable from 15 to 150 degrees F,

mounted in NEMA 4X enclosure, and shall be Chemelex, Catalog No. AMC-1A, or equal.

3. Aluminum heat transfer tape shall be 2 mil thickness, 2-1/2-in wide and shall be Chemelex, Catalog No. AT-150 or equal.

P. Emergency Shower Alarm Horn and Light

1. Emergency shower alarm horn shall be vibrating type for 120 Volts, 60 Hz and shall be Federal Signal Corp., Cat. No. 350+WB for surface mounting, Cat. No. 350+FG+FB for flush mounting, equal by Benjamin Co. or Edwards Co. or equal.

2. Emergency shower alarm light shall be a flashing strobe unit with red fresnel globe, for use

on a 120 Volts, 60 Hz power supply, and shall be Benjamin, Cat. No. KL-4011-120, equal by Federal Signal or Edwards Co. or equal.

Q. Photocells

1. The photocells shall be suitable for power duty with individual fixtures or for pilot duty with contactors as detailed on the Drawings. Enclosure shall be NEMA 3R or 4. Contacts shall be rated for 2,000 Watts continuous at 120 Volts. The unit shall turn on at 1.5 footcandles and off at 5.5 footcandles.


2. Photocells shall be TORK, Model 2101 or equal.

R. 24-Hour Programmable Timers

1. Unless otherwise specified, time switches shall be of the programmable type capable of being programmed at the intervals as noted on the Drawings over a 24-hour day. Program tabs shall be easily set by hand without tools to obtain or to change the desired programming schedule. The switching condition shall be maintained when adjacent tabs are set alike.

2. The unit shall be powered by a self-starting, enclosed, 120 Volt, synchronous motor

capable of continuous accurate operation. A reserve power, precision wound spring and associated escapement device shall be integrally mounted to maintain time settings during power failures of up to 24 hours.

3. The switch mechanism shall be a self-contained unit rated at not less than 20 Amps, 120

Volts, single pole, double throw and shall be readily replaceable in the field.

4. An omitting device shall be furnished as an integral part of the time switching operation to be skipped for any preselected day or days of the week.

5. Unless otherwise specified, time switches shall be as manufactured by Intermatic; TORK;

Paragon or equal. S. On-Delay, Off-Delay Timers (Solid State)

1. On and off delay timers shall be microprocessor based, solid state type.

2. Timers shall have the following features:

a. Adjustable timing ranges from 0.1 seconds to 99 hours, 59 minutes minimum.

b. Setpoints entered by pressing membrane covered keyboard on unit.

c. LCD readout of timing progress and setpoint.

d. Adjustable for on-delay or off-delay modes.

e. Standard sized plug-in case.

f. Totally sealed face plate.

g. Sealed battery backup power to retain memory for up to 30 days.

h. Accuracy plus or minus 0.01 second.

i. DPDT isolated instantaneous and timed output contacts rated 6 amps minimum at 120 Volt.

2. Timers shall be Bulletin 651 Multirange, solid state as manufactured by Tenor Co., Inc.;

Eagle Signal CS-300 Series or equal.


T. Equipment Mounting Stands

1. Equipment mounting stands shall be custom fabricated from 1/4-in steel plate and 4-in steel channel, as shown on the Drawings.

2. Hot dip galvanizing shall conform to the requirements of Division 5.

U. Pedestal Cabinet

1. Pedestal cabinet shall be outdoor weatherproof type suitable for mounting on a concrete pad as shown on the Drawings.

2. The pedestal cabinet shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel and shall be

weatherproof.

3. Cabinet shall have full size backboard of 3/4-in exterior plywood painted with two coats of polyurethane sealer.

4. Interior and exterior paint finish shall be baked enamel over a rust resistant primer.

5. Each door shall have three point latch and pin tumbler type door lock or provisions for

padlocking. Furnish six keys.

6. Pedestal cabinet shall have an internally mounted fan with thermostat control and door mounted baffled louvers.

7. Pedestals shall be complete with all mounting hardware and accessories required for

installation as shown on the Drawings.

8. Pedestal cabinet shall be Traffic Control Technologies, Cat. No. SMC-P (size as required) with light grey finish or equal.

2.05 PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards shall be in accordance with the Underwriter Laboratories, Inc. "Standard for Panelboards" and "Standard for Cabinets and Boxes" and shall be so labeled where procedures exist. Panelboards shall also comply with NEMA Standard for Panelboards and the National Electrical Code.


opening shall apply.

C. 120/240 Volt, single phase, 3 Wire and 120/208 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire panelboards shall be Type AQ as manufactured by the General Electric Company; Type NQOD as manufactured by Square D Co.; Type Pow-R-Line C as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, or equal.

D. 277/480 Volt, 3 Phase, 4 Wire panelboards shall be type AE as manufactured by the General

Electric Company; Type NEHB as manufactured by Square D Co.; Type Pow-R-Line C as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, or equal.


E. 480 Volt, 3 Phase, 3 Wire panelboards shall be type CCB as manufactured by the General Electric Company; I-Line series as manufactured by Square D Co.; Type Pow-R-Line C as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, or equal.

F. NEMA 3, 4 and 12 panelboards shall be type DVP or DHP as required by voltage application;

manufactured by the Crouse-Hinds Company or equal.

G. Rating

1. All panelboards shall be rated for the intended voltage.

2. Circuit breaker panelboards shall be fully rated for the specified circuit breaker fault current interrupting capacity. Series connected short circuit ratings will not be acceptable.

H. Buses

1. Bus bars for the mains shall be of copper. Full size neutral bars shall be included. Phase

bussing shall be full height without reduction. Cross connectors shall be copper.

2. Neutral bussing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection.

3. Spaces for future circuit breakers shall be bussed for the maximum device that can be fitted

into them.

4. Equipment ground bars shall be furnished.

I. Circuit Breakers

1. Panelboards shall be equipped with circuit breakers.

2. Circuit breakers shall be molded case, bolt-in type.

3. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by the panelboard manufacturer. 2.07 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM

A. Excavation and backfilling, including gravel and sand bedding, are included in Division 2.

B. Concrete and reinforcing steel are included in Division 3.

C. Raceways shall be polyvinyl chloride conduit encased in concrete except that rigid steel conduit shall be used for 600 Volt shielded wire and data highway wiring.

D. Handholes shall be precast concrete, heavy-duty type, designed for a Class H-20 wheel load and

conform to ASTM C478. Precast units shall be as manufactured by Chase Precast Corp.; American Precast Co. or equal and constructed to dimensions as shown on the Drawings.

E. Handhole frames and covers shall be cast iron, heavy duty type for Class H-20 wheel loading.

2.08 GROUNDING


A. Ground rods shall be 3/4-in by 10-ft copper clad steel and constructed in accordance with UL 467. The minimum copper thickness shall be 0.25 mm. Ground rods shall be Copperweld or equal.

B. Grounding conduit hubs shall be malleable iron type similar to Thomas & Betts Co.; Cat No.

3940 (3/4-in conduit size) by Burndy; O.Z./Gedney Co. or equal, and of the correct size for the conduit.

C. Waterpipe ground clamps shall be cast bronze saddle type, similar to Thomas & Betts Co. Cat.

No. 2 (1/2-in, 3/4-in, or 1-in size) or equal by Burndy; O.Z./Gedney Co. or equal, and of the correct size for the pipe.

D. Buried grounding connections shall be by Cadweld process, or equal exothermic welding

system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SLEEVES AND FORMS FOR OPENINGS

A. Provide and place all sleeves for conduits penetrating floors, walls, partitions, etc. Locate all necessary slots for electrical work and form before concrete is poured.

B. Exact locations are required for stubbing-up and terminating concealed conduit. Obtain shop

drawings and templates from equipment vendors or other subcontractors and locate the concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured.

C. Where setting drawings are not available in time to avoid delay in scheduled floor slab pours,

the Engineer may allow the installations of such conduit to be exposed. Requests for this deviation must be submitted in writing. No additional compensation for such change will be allowed.

D. Seal all openings, sleeves, penetration and slots.

3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and patching shall be done in a thoroughly workmanlike manner and be in compliance with modifications and repair to concrete. Sawcut concrete and masonry prior to breaking out sections.

B. Core drill holes in concrete floors and walls as required.

C. Install work at such time as to require the minimum amount of cutting and patching.

D. Do not cut joists, beams, girders, columns or any other structural members.

E. Cut opening only large enough to allow easy installation of the conduit.

F. Patching to be of the same kind and quality of material as was removed.

G. The completed patching work shall restore the surface to its original appearance or better.


H. Patching of waterproofed surfaces shall render the area of the patching completely waterproofed.

I. Remove rubble and excess patching materials from the premises.

J. When existing conduits are cut at the floor line of wall line, they shall be filled with grout of

suitable patching material. 3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Any work not installed according to the Specifications shall be subject to change as directed by the Engineer. No extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes.

B. Electrical equipment shall be protected at all times against mechanical injury or damage by

water. Electrical equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Electrical equipment shall be stored in dry permanent shelters. Do not install electrical equipment in its permanent location until structures are weather-tight. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and tested as directed by the Engineer, or shall be replaced at no additional cost at the Engineer's discretion.

C. Equipment that has been damaged shall be replaced or repaired by the equipment manufacturer,

at the Engineer's discretion.

D. Repaint any damage to factory applied paint finish using touch-up paint furnished by the equipment manufacturer. The entire damaged panel or section shall be repainted per the field painting specifications in Section 09902, at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Coordinate the conduit installation with other trades and the actual supplied equipment.

F. Install each 3 phase circuit in separate conduit.

G. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, conduit installed interior to the building shall be

installed exposed; conduit installed exterior to the building shall be concealed.

H. Verify the exact locations and mounting heights of lighting fixtures, switches and receptacles prior to installation.

I. Exact locations of electrical equipment shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by

the Engineer during construction. Obtain information relevant to the placing of electrical work and in case of any interference with other work, proceed as directed by the Engineer and furnish all labor and materials necessary to complete the work in an approved manner.

3.04 MANUFACTURERS SERVICE

A. Provide manufacturer's services for testing and start-up and training of the following equipment (as required):

1. Automatic Transfer Switches 2. 480 Volt Switchgear 3. 480 Volt Motor Control Centers 4. Fire Alarm System 5. Security Alarm System


B. Testing and startup shall not be combined with training. Testing and start-up time shall not be

used for manufacturers warranty repairs. 3.05 BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. Except where otherwise specified, all wiring shall be in rigid steel conduit.

B. Rigid steel conduit shall be used at all locations (underground and within structures) as raceways for shielded process instrumentation wiring, shielded control wiring, and I/O wiring.

C. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be used in areas designated "CORROSIVE."

D. PVC conduit shall be used for concrete encased underground duct banks except as specified in

Paragraph 3.05B above.

E. Aluminum conduit shall be used for exposed conduit runs outdoors, in areas designated as "WET" or "Class 1, Div. 1."

F. All boxes shall be metal.

G. Exposed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes and condulet fittings shall be cast or

malleable iron, except that cast aluminum shall be used with aluminum conduit.

H. Concealed switch, receptacle and lighting outlet boxes shall be pressed steel.

I. Terminal boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes shall have NEMA ratings suitable for the location in which they are installed.

J. Conduit wall seals shall be used where underground conduits penetrate walls.

K. Conduit sealing bushings shall be used to seal conduit ends exposed to the weather.

L. No conduit smaller than 3/4-in electrical trade size shall be used, nor shall any have more than

the equivalent of three 90 degree bends in any one run. Pull boxes shall be provided as required or directed.

M. No wire shall be pulled until the conduit system is complete in all details.

N. The ends of all conduits shall be tightly plugged to exclude dust and moisture during

construction.

O. Conduit supports, other than for underground raceways, shall be spaced at intervals of 8-ft or less.

P. Conduit hangers shall be attached to structural steel by means of beam or channel clamps.

Where attached to concrete surfaces, concrete inserts of the spot type shall be provided.

Q. All conduits shall be run at right angles to and parallel with the surrounding wall and shall conform to the form of the ceiling. No diagonal runs will be allowed. Bends in parallel conduit runs shall be concentric. All conduits shall be run perfectly straight and true.


R. Conduit terminating in pressed steel boxes shall have double locknuts and insulated bushings.

S. Conduit terminating in NEMA 3R, 4, 4X and 12 enclosures shall be terminated with Myers type conduit hubs.

T. Conduits containing equipment grounding conductors and terminating in sheet steel boxes shall

have insulated throat grounding bushings.

U. Conduits shall be installed using threaded fittings.

V. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be used for all motor terminations, the primary and secondary of transformers, generator terminations and other equipment where vibration is present.

W. Flexible couplings shall be used in hazardous locations for all motor terminations and other

equipment where vibration is present.

X. Aluminum fittings and boxes shall be used with aluminum conduit. Aluminum conduit shall not be imbedded in concrete. Aluminum conduit shall be isolated from other metals with plastic sleeves or plastic-coated hangers. Strap wrenches shall be used for tightening aluminum conduit.

Y. Where conduits pass through openings in walls or floor slabs, the remaining openings shall be

sealed against the passage of flame and smoke.

Z. PVC conduit to non-metallic box connections shall be made with PVC socket to male thread terminal adapters with neoprene O-ring and PVC round edge bushings.

AA. Conduit ends exposed to the weather shall be sealed with conduit sealing bushings.

BB. PVC conduit shall be supported with non-metallic clamps, non-metallic racks and stainless steel

hardware.

CC. PVC boxes, conduit fittings, etc with integral hubs shall be solvent welded directly to the PVC conduit system.

DD. Non-metallic boxes with field drilled or punched holes shall be connected to the PVC conduit

system with threaded and gasketed PVC Terminal Adapters.

EE. All conduit entering or leaving a motor control center, switchboard or other multiple compartment enclosure shall be stubbed up into the bottom horizontal wireway or other manufacturer designated area, directly below the vertical section in which the conductors are to be terminated.

FF. Conduit sealing and drain fittings shall be installed in areas designated as NEMA 7.

GG. All conduit which may under any circumstance contain liquids such as water, condensation,

liquid chemicals, etc, shall be arranged to drain away from the equipment served. If conduit drainage is not possible, conduit seals shall be used to plug the conduits.

HH. Where no type or size is indicated for junction boxes, pull boxes or terminal cabinets, they shall

be sized in accordance with the requirements of N.E.C. Article 370.


II. Miscellaneous steel for the support of fixtures, boxes, transformers, starters, contactors, panels

and conduit shall be furnished and installed.

JJ. Steel channels, flat iron and channel iron shall be furnished and installed for the support of all electrical equipment and devices, where required, including all anchors, inserts, bolts, nuts, washers, etc for a rigid installation.

KK. Conduits passing from heated to unheated spaces, exterior spaces, refrigerated spaces, cold air

plenums, etc, shall be sealed with "Duxseal" as manufactured by Manville or seal fitting to prevent the accumulation of condensation.

LL. Rigid galvanized steel conduits which have been field cut and threaded shall be painted with

cold galvanizing compounds. MM Conduit expansion and deflection fittings shall be installed on all conduits crossing building

expansion joint. Where conduits are installed outdoors provide expansion and deflection fittings on all conduits crossing expansion joints or at 200 foot intervals which ever is the least dimension.

3.06 WIRE, CABLE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Uniquely identify all wires, cables and each conductor of multi- conductor cables (except lighting and receptacle wiring) at each end with wire and cable markers.

B. Use lubrications to facilitate wire pulling. Lubricants shall be UL approved for use with the

insulation specified.

C. All wire shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes where colored insulation is not available. Where tape is used as the identification system, it shall be applied in all junction boxes, and other accessible intermediate locations as well as at each termination.

D. The following coding shall be used:

System Wire Color

240/120 Volts Neutral White 1-Phase, 3-Wire Line 1 Black

Line 2 Red

208Y/120, Volts Neutral White 3-Phase, 4-Wire Phase A Black

Phase B Red Phase C Blue

240/120 Volts Neutral White 3-Phase, 4-Wire Phase A Black delta, center tap Phase B (High) Orange ground on phase Phase C Blue coil A-C

480Y/277 Volts Neutral White


3-Phase, 4-Wire Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow

E. Power conductors: Terminations shall be die type or set screw type pressure connectors as

specified. Splices (where allowed) shall be die type compression connector and waterproof with heat shrink boot or epoxy filling. Aluminum conductors (where specified) shall employ terminations and splices specifically designed for aluminum conductors.

F. Control Conductors: Termination on saddle-type terminals shall be wired directly with a

maximum of two conductors. Termination on screw type terminals shall be made with a maximum of two spade connectors. Splices (where allowed) shall be made with insulated compression type connectors.

G. Instrumentation Signal Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low and high level signals):

terminations same as for control conductors. Splices allowed at instrumentation terminal boxes only.

H. Except where permitted by the Engineer no splices will be allowed in manholes, handholes or

other below grade located boxes.

I. Splices shall not be made in push button control stations, control devices (i.e., pressure switches, flow switches, etc), conduit bodies, etc.

J. Instrumentation cables shall be installed in rigid steel raceways as specified. All circuits shall

be installed as twisted pairs or triads. In no case shall a circuit be made up using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever three wire circuits are required.

K. Terminal blocks shall be provided at all instrument cable junction and all circuits shall be

identified at such junctions.

L. Shielded instrumentation wire, shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels.

M. Shields shall be grounded as recommended by the instrument manufacturer and isolated at all

other locations. Terminal blocks shall be provided for inter-connecting shield drain wires at all junction boxes. Where individual circuit shielding is required, each shield circuit shall be provided with its own block.

3.07 WIRING DEVICES

A. Switch and receptacles outlets shall be installed flush with the finished wall surfaces in areas with stud frame and gypboard construction, in dry areas with cement block construction or when raceways are concealed.

B. Do not install flush mounted devices in areas designated DAMP, WET or WET/CORROSIVE.

Provide surface mounted devices in these areas.

C. Provide weatherproof devices covers in areas designated WET or WET/CORROSIVE. 3.08 PANELBOARDS


A. Mount boxes for surface mounted panelboards so there is at least 1/2-in air space between the box and the wall.

B. Connect panelboard branch circuit loads so that the load is distributed as equally as possible

between the phase busses.

C. Type circuit directories giving location and nature of load served. Install circuit directories in each panelboard.

D. Install markers on the front cover of all panelboards which identify the voltage rating. Markers

shall be made of self sticking B-500 vinyl cloth printed with black characters on an Alert Orange background, 2-1/4-in high by 9-in wide, Style A as manufactured by W.H. Brady Co. or equal.

E. Install a 1-in by 3-in laminated plastic nameplate with 1/4-in white letters on a black

background on each panelboard. Nameplate lettering shall be as shown on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be stainless steel screw mounted.

3.09 UNDERGROUND SYSTEM

A. Install raceways to drain away from buildings.

B. Reinforce raceway banks when conduits pass over newly excavated pipes.

C. The minimum cover for raceway banks shall be 24-in unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

D. Swab all raceways clean before installing cable.

E. Plug spare raceways and seal them watertight at all manholes, buildings and structures.

F. Seal the ends of raceways and make watertight at all handholes, buildings and structures.

3.10 GROUNDING

A. Run grounding electrode conductors in rigid steel conduits. Bond the protecting conduits to the grounding electrode conductors at both ends. Do not allow water pipe connections to be painted. If the connections are painted, disassemble them and re-make them with new fittings.

B. Install equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

C. Bond all steel building columns in new structures together with ground wire in rigid conduit

and connect to the distribution equipment ground bus.

D. Ground wire connections to structural steel columns shall be made with long barrel type one-hole heavy duty copper compression lugs, bolted through 1/2-in maximum diameter holes drilled in the column web, with stainless steel hex head cap screws and nuts.

E. Metal conduits stubbed into a motor control center shall be terminated with insulated grounding

bushings and connect to the motor control center ground bus. Bond boxes mounted below motor control centers to the motor control center ground bus. Size the grounding wire in accordance with NEC Table 250-95, except that a minimum No. 12 AWG shall be used.


F. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit in sizes 1-1/2-in and larger shall have bonding jumpers.

Bonding jumpers shall be external, run parallel (not spiraled) and fastened with plastic tie wraps.

G. Ground transformer neutrals to the nearest available grounding electrode with a conductor sized

in accordance with NEC Article 250-94.

H. Seal exposed connections between different metals with No-Oxide Paint Grade A or equal.

I. Lay all underground grounding conductors slack and, where exposed to mechanical injury, protect by pipes or other substantial guards. If guards are iron pipe, or other magnetic material, electrically connect conductors to both ends of the guard. Make connections as specified herein.

J. Care shall be taken to ensure good ground continuity, in particular between the conduit system

and equipment frames and enclosures. Where necessary, jumper wires shall be installed. K. All grounding type receptacles shall be grounded to the outlet boxes with a No. 12 THW green

conductor connected to the ground terminal of the receptacle and fastened to the outlet box by means of a grounding screw.

L. Test the grounding system. Resistance to ground testing shall be performed during dry season.

Submit test results in the form of a graph showing the number of points measured (12 minimum) and the numerical resistance to ground.

M. Testing shall be performed before energizing the distribution system.

N. Notify the Engineer immediately if the resistance to ground for any building or system is

greater than five ohms. END OF SECTION


SECTION 16115 CABLE TRAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OR WORK

A. Furnish and install complete cable tray systems, with all accessories, fittings, supports, as indicated specified, and in accordance with the latest applicable NEMA and ASTM standards.

B. Cable tray runs outline the general routing of raceways. Select actual routing in the field to

follow Drawings as closely as possible and to avoid interfering with pipes, ducts, structural members, or other equipment. Deviations in routing from that shown on the Drawings must be approved by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.02 RELATED WORK

A. Submittals are included in Section 01300. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, the following:

1. Shop Drawings: Indicate tray type, dimensions, support points and finishes.

2. Product Data: Provide data for fittings and accessories.

3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation and starting of product.


A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

1. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.


1. ASTM B633 SC1 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1. NEMA VE-1 - Metallic Cable Tray Systems

2. NEMA FG-1 - Fiberglass Cable Tray Systems.

D. Canadian Standards Association (CAN/CSA)


1. CAN/CSA C22.2 - No. 126-M91 Cable Tray Systems

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

F. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time

of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with a minimum of 5 years experience.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. T.J. Cope

B. B-Line

C. Chalfant

D. Omnitray 2.02 LADDER-TYPE CABLE TRAY

A. Description: NEMA VE 1, Class 20C ladder type tray.

B. Material: Steel

C. Finish: ASTM A123, hot dipped galvanized after fabrication.

D. Inside Width: as shown on the drawings or to match existing

E. Inside Depth: as shown on the drawings or to match existing

F. Provide stainless steel clamps, hangers, brackets, splice plates, reducer plates, blind ends, barrier strips, connectors and grounding straps.



A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install metallic cable tray in accordance with NEMA VE 1.

C. Provide supports at each connection point, at the end of each run, and at other points to maintain spacing between supports to match existing.

D. Use expansion connectors where required.

E. Ground and bond cable tray under provisions of NEC Article 318.

1. Provide continuity between tray components.

2. Use anti-oxidant compound to prepare aluminum contact surfaces before assembly.

F. Provide cable tray angle brackets and supports to keep cable tray from swaying or

moving horizontally. Mount on each side every 30-ft. END OF SECTION


SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLT MAXIMUM) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish, install and test all wire, cable and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Install data highway fiber optic, coaxial and I/O cables furnished under Division 13.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit, in accordance with Section 01300, samples of proposed wire. Each sample

shall have the size, type of insulation and voltage stenciled on the jacket.

B. Approved samples will be sent to the project location for comparison by the Resident Engineer with the wire actually installed.

C. Installed unapproved wire shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the

Owner. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Carefully handle all conductors to avoid kinks and damage to insulation. 1.04 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall warrant the cable against defects for a period of 20 years from date of installation and shall remove and replace defective cables at his own expense during this warranty period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Wires and cables shall be of annealed, 98 percent conductivity, soft drawn copper.

B. All conductors shall be stranded, except that lighting and receptacle wiring may be solid.

C. Except for control, signal and instrumentation circuits, wire smaller than No. 12 AWG shall not be used.

D. Wire shall have 600 volt insulation except where indicated otherwise. E. Conductors installed in plenums shall be marked PLENUM RATED.


F. All wire of a given type shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

2.02 BUILDING WIRE

A. Wire for lighting, receptacles and other circuits not exceeding 150 Volts to ground shall be NEC type as manufactured by General Cable.; American Insulated Wire Corp.; Southwire Co.; or equal.

B. Wire for circuits over 150 Volts to ground within buildings and structures shall be NEC type as

manufactured by General Cable.; American Insulated Wire Corp.; Southwire Co.; or equal. C. Wire for circuits over 150 Volts to ground used underground or for service entrance shall be

NEC type RHH-RHW-2/USE-2, flame retardant and CT rated as manufactured by The Okonite Co.; General Cable.; American Insulated Wire Corp.; or equal.

D. Wire for direct burial outdoor lighting circuits shall be NEC type RHH-RHW-2/USE-2 as

manufactured by The Okonite Co.; General Cable; American Insulated Wire Corp.; or equal. The RHH-RHW-2 or USE-2, sizes 1/0 AWG and larger shall be marked “sunlight resistant for use in cable tray”. Cable shall meet all requirements of ICEA S-95-658, NEMA WC-70, UL 44, UL 854, and UL 1581 (for use in cable tray).

E. Bare copper ground wire shall be stranded, annealed copper wire ASTM-B3 alloy coated soft

copper electrical wire ASTM B189.

F. Multi-conductor power cables shall have stranded conductors with type [THHN/THWN] [XLP] insulated, nylon conductor covering, and an overall PVC jacket covering over the individual wires. The number of conductors shall be] as indicated on the Drawings. Cable shall be TC rated meeting UL 1277 and IEEE 383 Standards. Cable shall be flame resistant, non-propagating and shall be suitable for installation in a Class I, Division II hazardous location and for direct burial in earth. Multi-conductor power cables, sizes #12 AWG and larger, shall be furnished with a green ground conductor and a white neutral conductor where required to serve phase to neutral loads. Cable shall be as manufactured by The Okonite Co.; Southwire Co.; General Cable Co., or equal.

G. Aluminum sheath cable shall have multi-conductor copper conductors rated 90 degrees C for

use in wet or dry locations, cable tray, embedded in concrete, areas subjected to corrosive atmospheres, or direct burial applications. Insulation shall be listed UL Type XHHW-2. Sheath shall be close fitting, impervious, continuous, welded, corrugated aluminum per UL 1569. Cable shall be as manufactured by The Okonite Co.; General Cable; Southwire Co.; or equal.

H. Equipment grounding conductors shall be NEC Type THW green and sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-122. Ground grid conductors shall be insulated unless shown otherwise on the Drawings.

2.03 CONTROL, STATUS AND ALARM WIRE

A. Wire shall be No.14 AWG NEC type THHN/THWN, stranded as manufactured by The Okonite Co.; General Cable.; American Insulated Wire Corp.; Southwire Co.; or equal.


B. Multi-conductor control cable, where shown on the Drawings, shall be stranded, No. 14 AWG,

600 Volt, polyvinyl chloride insulated, nylon jacket over insulation, polyvinyl chloride jacket overall, Type TC as manufactured by The Okonite Co.; General Cable ; American Insulated Wire Corp.; or equal. The number of conductors shall be as shown on the Drawings.

2.04 INSTRUMENTATION WIRE

A. Wire for process instrumentation signals (i.e. 1-5 VDC, 4-20 mADC), R.T.D., potentiometer and similar signals shall be:

1. Single pair cable:

a. Conductors: 2 No. 16 stranded and twisted on 2-in lay

b. Insulation: PVC with 300 Volt, 105 degrees C rating

c. Shield: 100% Aluminum/polyester foil with drain wire

d. Jacket: PVC with UL Subject 13, UL 1581 and manufacturers’ identification

e. Max overall diameter: 0.262-in

f. Miscellaneous: UL Listed as Instrument Tray Cable/Power Limited Tray Cable

(PLTC) for use in accordance with Article 727 and Article 725 of the NEC.

g. Manufacturers: Belden No. 1030A; Manhattan No. M39119; General Cable No. C0456; The Okanite Co.; or equal

2. Three conductor (triad) cable:

a. Conductors: 3 No. 16 stranded and twisted on 2-in lay


c. Shield: 100% Aluminum/polyester foil with drain wire

d. Jacket: PVC with UL Subject 13, UL 1581 and manufacturers’ identification

e. Max overall diameter: 0.276-in

f. Miscellaneous: UL Listed as Instrument Tray Cable/Power Limited Tray Cable

(PLTC) for use in accordance with Article 727 and Article 725 of the NEC.

g. Manufacturers: Belden No. 1031A; Manhattan No. M39120; General Cable No. C0457; The Okanite Co.; or equal

3. Multiple pair cables (where shown on the Drawings):

a. Conductor: Multiple 2 No. 22 stranded and twisted on a 2-in lay



c. Shield: Individual pairs shielded with 100 percent mylar tape and drain wire

d. Jacket: PVC with UL Subject 13, UL 1581 manufacturers’ identification

e. Misc: UL Subject 13, Type PLTC

f. Manufacturers: Belden No. 9330, 9331, 9332, 9333, 9335, 9337;

Manhattan No. M39149, M39150, M39151, M39152, M39154, M39156. General Cable No. C0551, C0552, C0553, C0554, C0555, C0556

2.05 SPLICES (POWER CONDUCTORS)

A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, splices shall not be made in the cables without prior written approval of the Engineer. Where splicing is approved by the Engineer, splicing materials for all 600 Volt splices shall be made with long barrel, tin plated copper compression (hydraulically pressed) connectors and insulated with heavy wall heat shrinkable tubing. The conductivity of all completed connections shall be not less than that of the uncut conductor. The insulation resistance of all completed connections of insulated conductors shall be not less than that of the uncut conductor.

B. Wire lugs shall be tin plated copper, long barrel compression type (hydraulically pressed) for wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger. Lugs for No. 10 AWG and smaller wire shall be locking spade type with insulated sleeve. Lugs shall be as manufactured by the Thomas and Betts Co.; Burndy; Amp; or equal.

C. Compression type connectors shall be insulated with a heat shrink boot or outer covering and

epoxy filling. Splice kits shall be as manufactured by Raychem (Tyco); Ideal Industries; 3M Co. or equal.

D. Solderless pressure connectors shall be self-contained, waterproof and corrosion-proof units

incorporating prefilled silicone grease to block out moisture and air. Connectors shall be sized according to manufacturer's recommendations. The connectors shall be UL listed and CSA approved, as manufactured by King Innovation; Ideal Industries, Inc., or equal.

2.06 MOTOR CONNECTIONS

A. Motor connections shall be ring type mechanical compression terminations installed on the branch circuit wires and the motor leads and secured with bolt, nut and springwasher. Connections shall be insulated with a Raychem Type RVC, roll-on stub insulator; Thomas & Betts, Shrink-Kon MSCV20; or equal. For wire sizes N0. 8 and larger, long barrel, tin plated copper compression (hydraulically pressed) type connections Burndy Co., or equal) shall be installed on the branch circuit wires and the motor leads. Connections shall be insulated with heavy duty heat shrinkable material (Raychem Corp., or equal.

2.07 TERMINATION AND SPLICES (CONTROL, STATUS AND ALARM CONDUCTORS)


A. Termination connectors shall be of the locking fork-end (upturned leg ends) type as manufactured by Ideal Industries; 3M Co.; Panduit Corp. or equal.

B. Insulated compression type connectors shall be of the expanded vinyl insulated parallel or

pigtail type as manufactured by Ideal Industries; 3M Co.; Panduit Corp. or equal.

C. Solderless pressure connectors shall be self-contained, waterproof and corrosion-proof units incorporating prefilled silicone grease to block out moisture and air. Connectors shall be sized according to manufacturer's recommendations. The connectors shall be UL listed and CSA approved, as manufactured by King Innovation; Ideal Industries, Inc or equal.

2.08 TERMINATIONS (INSTRUMENTATION CABLES)

A. Termination connectors shall be of the locking fork-end (upturned leg ends) type as manufactured by Ideal Industries; 3M Co.; Panduit Corp. or equal.

2.09 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Wire and cable markers shall be "Omni-Grip" type-written heat shrinkable type as manufactured by the W.H. Brady Co.; Thomas & Betts Co., SMS; 3M Co., STD-TAG; or equal.

B. Wire and cables with diameters exceeding the capacity of the "Omni-Grip" shall be marked with

pre-printed, self-adhesive vinyl tapes as manufactured by the W.H. Brady Co.; Panduit Corp.; 3M Co.; or equal.


A. Uniquely identify all wires, cables and each conductor of multi-conductor cables (except lighting and receptacle wiring) at each end and in all manholes, hand holes and pull boxes with wire and cable markers.

B. Use lubrications to facilitate wire pulling. Lubricants shall be UL approved for use with the

insulation specified. C. Provide multi-conductor control and signal cables within the underground system. Cables shall

be installed continuous from building to building without splices. Individual control conductors and twisted shielded pairs signal cables will not be allowed in underground systems.

D. The crimping tools used in securing the conductor in the compression type connectors or terminal lugs shall be those made for that purpose and for the conductor sizes involved. The crimping tool shall be the ratchet type which prevents the tool from opening until the crimp action is completed. Such tools shall be a product of the connector manufacturer.

E. Install an equipment grounding conductor in all raceways.

F. Seal openings in slabs and walls through which wires and cables pass.


G. Pull cables from the direction that requires the least tension. Use a feed-in tube and sheave designed for cable installation. Use sheaves with radii that exceed the cable manufacturer’s recommended minimum bending radius. Use a dynamometer and constant velocity power puller. Velocity should not be less than 15-ft./min. or more than 50-ft./min. Do not exceed the cable manufacturer’s maximum recommended tension.

H. If cable can not be terminated immediately after installation, install heat shrinkable end caps.

I. Fireproof exposed cables in manholes, vaults, pullboxes, switchgear and other areas not protected by conduit where medium voltage cables are present. Use fire-proofing tape and glass tape in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Fire-proofing tape shall be installed with one half-lapped layer of Scotch Brand 77 Electric Arc and Fireproofing Tape (3M Corp., or equal). Tape shall be secured with a two-layer band of Scotch Brand 69 Glass Electrical Tape (3M Corp., or equal) over the last wrap.

1. For fiber optic cable systems provided under Division 16, provide breakout kits and splices. 3.03 WIRE COLOR CODE

A. All wire shall be color coded or coded using electrical tape in sizes where colored insulation is not available. Where tape is used as the identification system, it shall be applied in all junction boxes, manholes and other accessible intermediate locations as well as at each termination.

B. The following coding shall be used:

System Wire Color

240/120 Volts Neutral White Single-Phase, 3 Wire Line 1 Black

Line 2 Red

208Y/120, Volts Neutral White 3 Phase, 4 Wire Phase A Black

Phase B Red Phase C Blue

240/120 Volts Neutral White 3 Phase, 4 Wire Phase A Black delta, center tap Phase B (High) Orange ground on phase Phase C Blue coil A-C

480Y/277 Volts Neutral White 3 Phase, 4 Wire Phase A Brown

Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow

C. Neutral or ground wires that terminate in a Panelboard and require color tape shall have the

color tape extend at least 6-in from the termination point.


3.04 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES

A. Power conductors: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, no splices may be made in the cables without prior written approval of the Engineer. Where splicing is approved, terminations shall be die type or set screw type pressure connectors as specified. Splices (where allowed) shall be die type compression connector and waterproof with heat shrink boot or epoxy filling for copper conductors # 4 AWG and larger. Splices shall be solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductors # 6 AWG and smaller. Aluminum conductors (where specified) shall employ terminations and splices specifically designed for aluminum conductors.

B. Control Conductors: Termination on saddle-type terminals shall be wired directly with a

maximum of two conductors. Termination on screw type terminals shall be made with a maximum of two spade connectors. Splices (where allowed) shall be made with insulated compression type connectors.

C. Instrumentation Signal Conductors (including graphic panel, alarm, low and high level signals):

terminations same as for control conductors. Splices allowed at instrumentation terminal boxes only.

D. Except where permitted by the Engineer no splices will be allowed in manholes, handholes or

other below grade located boxes.

E. Splices shall not be made in push button control stations, control devices (i.e., pressure switches, flow switches, etc), conduit bodies, etc.

3.05 INSTRUMENTATION CABLES

A. Instrumentation cables shall be installed in rigid steel raceways as specified. All circuits shall be installed as twisted pairs or triads. In no case shall a circuit be made up using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever three wire circuits are required.

B. Terminal blocks shall be provided at all instrument cable junction and all circuits shall be

identified at such junctions.

C. Shielded instrumentation wire, coaxial, data highway, I/O and fiber optic cables shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels.

D. Ground shielding on instrumentation wires at one end only as recommended by the instrument

manufacturer and isolated at all other locations. Terminal blocks shall be provided for inter-connecting shield drain wires at all junction boxes. Where individual circuit shielding is required, each shield circuit shall be provided with its own block.

E. Install shielded instrumentation wire in conduit and pull boxes that contain only shielded instrumentation wire. Instrumentation cables shall be separated from all other (i.e. power, control, etc.) cables in manholes by enclosing them within rigid steel raceways and boxes.

F. Shielded cable terminations at each end shall be provided with heat shrinkable tubing placed over the exposed shield and conductors. The tubing shall extend 1-in minimum over the jacket end and extend 0.5-in minimum from the jacket end over the exposed conductors.


3.06 FIELD TESTING A. Test all 600 volt wire insulation with a megohm meter after installation and prior to termination.

Make tests at not less than 1000 Volts DC. Test duration shall be one minute. Submit a written test report of the results to the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing 48 hours prior to testing.

B. Field testing and commissioning shall be done in accordance with the latest revision of the “Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems” published by the International Electrical Testing Association (NETA Standard ATS-1999) unless otherwise modified by this Section. Minimum wire insulation resistance shall not be less than 250 Megohms.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16150

MOTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. All motors shall be furnished as called for in other Sections of these Specifications and shall be in conformance with the requirements of this section.

1.02 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Routine tests shall be performed on representative motors, and shall include the information described on NEMA MG1-12.54 "Report of Test Form for Routine Tests on Induction Motors". Efficiency shall be determined in accordance with IEEE Publication No. 112, Method B. Power factor shall be measured on representative motors.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal of motor data for acceptance shall include complete nameplate data and test characteristics in accordance with NEMA Standard MG1-12.54 "Report of Test Form for Routine Tests on Induction Motors" and, in addition, the following for motors typical of the units furnished:

1. Efficiency at 1/2, 3/4 and full load

2. Power factor at 1/2, 3/4 and full load

3. Motor outline, dimensions and weight

4. Descriptive bulletins, including full description of insulation system

5. Bearing design data

6. Special features (i.e., space heaters, temperature detectors, etc.)

7. Power factor correction capacitor rating and type.

B. The motor manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer as provided in Section 01300, certified

dimension prints showing nameplate data and outline dimensions within three weeks of the date they receive the order.

C. Guarantee: All equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall be guaranteed

against defects of workmanship, materials and proper installation for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance. All such equipment or parts proven defective, due to the above noted


causes, shall be replaced in the machines by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

D. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Section 01740. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply.


A. Unless otherwise noted, all motors below 1½ horsepower shall be rated 115/230 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hertz A.C.

B. All motors shall be built in accordance with current NEMA, IEEE, ANSI and AFBMA

standards. Motors shall be of the type and quality described by this Section and other Divisions of the Specifications, and/or as shown on the Drawings, fully capable of performing in accordance with Manufacturer's nameplate rating, and free from defective material and workmanship.

2.02 RATINGS

A. All motors shall be sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed their full-rated load when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity and over the operational range. Unless otherwise noted, motors driving pumps, blowers, etc. shall not be overloaded at any head or discharge condition. The motor shall not be required to deliver more than its rated nameplate horsepower, at the 1.0 service factor, under any condition of mechanical or hydraulic loading (i.e. although a 1.15 service factor is required, it may not be used under any condition).

B. Each motor shall develop ample torque for its required service throughout its acceleration

range at a voltage 10 percent below nameplate rating. Where shown on the Electrical Drawings to be operated on a reduced voltage starter, the motor shall develop ample torque under the conditions imposed by the reduced voltage starting method.

C. All motors shall be continuous time rated suitable for operation in a 40 degrees C ambient

unless noted otherwise.

D. Specific motor data such as Hp, rpm, etc., is specified under the detailed specification for the equipment with which the motor is supplied.


2.03 NAMEPLATES

A. The motor manufacturer's nameplates shall be engraved or embossed on stainless steel and fastened to the motor frame with stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall indicate clearly all of the items of information enumerated in NEMA Standard MG1-10.38 or MG1-20.60, as applicable.

2.04 CONSTRUCTION

A. General:

1. All drip-proof and weather protected Type I and Type II motors shall have epoxy encapsulated windings. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with an upgraded insulation by additional dips and bakes to increase moisture resistance and shall not be encapsulated. Motors for outdoor service shall have vacuum pressure impregnated (VPI) epoxy insulation for moisture resistance. Two speed motors shall be of the two winding type.

2. Squirrel-cage rotors shall be made from high-grade steel laminations adequately fastened

together and to the shaft, or shall be cast aluminum or bar-type construction with brazed end rings.

3. All motors shall be of the premium efficiency and high power factor type. All motors

shall be the corrosion resistant type conforming to motors designated as “Corro-Duty” by U.S. Motors or equal.

4. Vertical motors shall be hollow or solid shaft as required by the equipment furnished

under other Sections of these Specifications.

5. Totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) motors shall include the same ratings and accessories as specified for TEFC motors. Explosion-proof motors shall be UL listed and FM approved for Class 1, Division 1 hazardous areas.

B. Low Voltage, Single Phase Motors:

1. Single phase motors shall be split-phase and capacitor-start induction types rated for

continuous horsepower at the rpm indicated on the drawings or as required by the specifications. Motors shall be rated 115/230 volts, 60 Hertz, single phase, open dripproof, or totally enclosed fan cooled as indicated on the drawings or as required by the specifications, with temperature rise in accordance with NEMA Standards for Class B insulation.

2. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall be designed for severe-duty.


3. Motors shall have corrosion and fungus protective finish on internal and external surfaces. All fittings shall have corrosion protective plating.

4. Mechanical characteristics shall be the same as specified for polyphase fractional horsepower motors.


Add drawings from pdf file